V] 
 
 ^W 
 
 / 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 •- IIIIIM 
 
 1^ 
 
 1^ li^ 
 
 2,2 
 
 
 iia£ 
 
 tut 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 14 11.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 k 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 \ 
 
 '<3\ 
 
 :/. 
 
 
 •1>^ 
 
 \\ 
 
 rv 
 
 
 
 ;\ 
 
 
 p 
 
Ls? 
 
 CIHM 
 Microfiche 
 Series 
 (Monograpiis) 
 
 ICMH 
 
 Collection de 
 microfiches 
 (monographies) 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 nn 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes / Notes techniques et bibliographiqiies 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original 
 copy available for filming. Features of this copy which 
 may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any 
 of the images in the reproduction, or which may 
 significantly change the usual method of filming, are 
 checked below. 
 
 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 □ Covers damaged/ 
 Couverture endommagee 
 
 □ Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restauree et/ou pelliculee 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Caites geographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et'ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relie avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding nay cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion le long de la marge interieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may apfiear 
 within the text. Whenever possible, these have 
 been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutees 
 lors d'ur<; restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mc.s, lorsque cela etait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas ete filmees. 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il 
 lui a et^ possible de se procurer. Les details de cet 
 exemplaire qui sont peut-£tre uniques du point de vue 
 bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image 
 reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modif )cation 
 dans la methode normale de filmage sont indiques 
 ci-dessous. 
 
 □ Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 □ Pages damaged/ 
 Piges endommagees 
 
 □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurees et/ou pellicul^s 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages decolorees, tachetees ou piquees 
 
 □ Pages detached/ 
 Pages detachees 
 
 0" 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 ansparence 
 
 Quality of print varies/ 
 Qualite inegate de I'impression 
 
 Continuous pagination/ 
 Pagination continue 
 
 n 
 
 □ Includes ir 
 Comprend 
 
 index(es)/ 
 Comprend un (des) index 
 
 Title on header taken from:/ 
 Le titre de len-tfite provient: 
 
 □ Title page of issue/ 
 Pa 
 
 Page de titre de la livraison 
 
 □ Caption of issue/ 
 Titre de depart de la li 
 
 ivraison 
 
 I I Masthead/ 
 
 V 
 
 Addit'onal comments:/ 
 Coinmentaires supplementaires: 
 
 Generique (periodiques) de la livraison 
 Page <i<( is incorrectly numbered page 4. 
 
 This Item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filme au taux ae reduction indique ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 
 
 I I I I I I . 
 
 J 
 
 12 X 
 
 16X 
 
 r?x 
 
 :6) 
 
 30 X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 n 
 
 32 X 
 
The copy filmed hore has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grSce d la 
 g^n^rositd de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or ihtustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and anding on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol -^^ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de ia nettetd de I'exemplairp filrr.e, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprim^p sont film^s en commengant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont film^s en commenpant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre paga qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE", le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN ". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent §tre 
 filmds d des taux de reduction diff^rents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour §tre 
 reproduit en un seul cliche, il est filmd d partir 
 de Tangle sup^rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'fmages ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 22X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
H 
 
 L 
 
 VVITI 
 
no (, 
 
 HEVISED EDrnON 
 
 Language Lessons.- 
 
 AN r.Li;Ari::,-T.M;Y 
 
 nuAMMAn AX]) coAfPosrrroN 
 
 ADArTi:n to -iwr-: n; Q;i,r;;nrr..-,T., op tifh 
 
 Puuj.ic scTL>oj.:5 o:p o-^tauio. 
 
 . rnnrARn. as an iNTi:ru„vTiu:; to ma.,v/. okammah 
 
 BY 
 
 J. MACMIIJ.AN', ]\r.A., 
 
 OTTAWA fOLI.KaiiiU: INSTITUTB, 
 
 VVITI, EXAMINATION PAIHUS .SET LOR ADMISSION TO 
 
 UKJir SCHOOLS. 
 
 (P^// Edition -2CQtk Thcusmid,) • 
 
 TORONTO: 
 \V. J. GAGE h 
 
 CO, 
 
 1 
 
 Q'.^ •» 
 
 f Bi 
 
p[ llfl 
 
 li %~l^ 
 
 Entorod acc.irdinor to Act of tho Parllaniont of Csuiaila, In Uio year one 
 thousand oiicht humlrod and sovcnty-seven, iiy A:<x.4 AlihiiKii Hi. Co., 
 in t)io otlico of tlie Minister of Agriciiltuiv. 
 
riiEFACE. 
 
 of rules an.l ,ioll,uti..,M. " TI.o -urtl ■ r .' ' ^'"^ •'^""^y 
 "-. «one,.ally .peaUi... bo to « ^1 L/'"'';'' ;"'" '''"'''^■• 
 ence iu tho ,.Iai„e.t -ml Z t i . ^'^tro.luan;/ any s.i- 
 
 «yntl.otic.al iAl, nl; 0, X . "" " T'"'' ' "'''"^ ^''° 
 will, speed,, to t,.r„ it ovevlicK '" '"•■"''' *" ''■=•■" 
 
 progrossivo teacl^crs ; for su ZL ■ 7' "^ '''"''^' ""^ 
 tho body of tL n- n' . T . f '"" "' ''^'^^"^'^^'^ "''''* ^-'•"' 
 
 method ^..„e</,;rri, ;:;M^T:.rr r^-' ^"" ^"^ 
 
 Hchool papers tlio dimcnltios thit .1,! i, ^""' J'' "^ numbers of 
 BpoakinKand writii,. "f„. S, , ' '''^''" "'^'^''^^'j^ encounter in 
 ».y practice au^^r^^^^^^ '"' """ ^^ ^^«* "^«^« ^i^lenitics 
 
 
rv 
 
 rnKrACR. 
 
 .'* A word as to tlio exorcises. T-Iiesi arc the Book. They are 
 numerous Jiud Rnu^uatcd, and are };iven from the first witli a 
 view to (X)Mrosii'ioN. The attention of the toachcsr is e8i)ecially 
 8olicili!d to tliese exercises, and at Ica.st an experimental follow- 
 iiiy of the directions and suggestions here given is particularly 
 ri'iiuestod. 
 
 Three methods of oorrectin;^ the written exeri'isos are sug- 
 gested j 1, Tiie clianyinj,' ol pa^icrs ; 2, 'J'lio wriLin;,' of letters 
 of ciitirism ; ;}, 'J'Jie itlacin;:; of one or iikiio exercises ujion the 
 Itlaclilioard as a l;asis of oral class-' riti'isin. It has not been 
 thou;^ht necessary to indicate in c\t>ry case the jiarticular i)lan to 
 1)0 pursued. 'I'he tcaclier should vary the method from time to 
 time. 
 
 ]?]n^:FACE TO FIFTH ]<:])riTO]sr. 
 
 In this Edition of tho " Lmn/uar/c T.issons" an attemi)t hag 
 licen made to brinj; the Dejinitiom and Clitssijlcations of tho 
 Tarts of Siiccch into luirmony with tliosc yivon in Mason's lar^o 
 work. It is very imi)ortaut tluit in an introductory work on 
 granunar, whatever has been learned in the important depart- 
 ments of definition and classification should not require to bo un- 
 learned, when tho ]>upil is introduced to tlio study of the larj;(?» 
 and nioro advanced text-book. Mason's (Irammar is now rccog- 
 r.ized as tho standard work on that subject, and tho chant;es intro 
 riuced into this IMition of tho ^ Ldnr/uage Lessons' will there- 
 fore commend themselves to the te;ichers of tho Province. Wo 
 firmly believe tliat these chanj^es are not only correct, but that 
 tlicy will greatly tend to render tiio Lan(j}ia;/e l.c'sso7is more 
 acceptable than ever to both te;ichora and puidls iu their study of 
 tills most importiint subject. 
 
 Ottawa, March, 187b. 
 
. Thoy are 
 first with a 
 is esiJOciiiUy 
 iiital follow- 
 liiviticuliirly 
 
 OS .iro suf];- 
 ■^ of lettoi'rt 
 jrt Upon tlio 
 ;iK not boon 
 ;ul!U' [)l!in to 
 oiu time to 
 
 ON. 
 
 ;ittcini)t lias 
 tions of tlio 
 ason's laij;e 
 •y work on 
 taut depart- 
 iro to bo im- 
 if the lar;;c?» 
 i now rccof^- 
 ianj;cs intro 
 will there- 
 Dvince. "Wo 
 ct, but that 
 /ssoiis more 
 oir study of 
 
 I 
 
 CONTi^iNTS. 
 
 Lkshou I. Introd.i.-tory '''^"' J 
 
 1 1. Tlie S(-ntence ., 
 
 „ '''• f^i'l.jtTt nnd I'rodir.ilo .' " ' " 4 
 
 ,_^^ J"^'- !'<''*'••'"" in Critici.xini; ,j 
 
 ^, ^' Subject iiiid I'retliciitu ' .".'..'.".".'. ^ 
 
 VI. Kinds of Words , , 
 
 VH. XouiKs J 
 
 VIFI. Vcr!,s ' 
 
 „ ''^- i-f'^on on Nmiilier ^^ 
 
 „ ^- Irro-ular Xunihers "'. . ..'.." vj 
 
 J-^- Irn-iilur Sin-iilnis ;ind rinralH.!. ... ~y\ 
 
 ^-^'f- I>Ptt(;r (if Criticism ",- 
 
 Xni. Adjoclivps ."„ 
 
 „ -^f^- Coiiipiirison of Adjectives .' ," 31 
 
 ^^ XV. Sentences witli Adjectives. . . . ."...,'.. . " 3,4 
 
 ^^ ^X VI. Predicate Adjectives '^j 
 
 XVlf. Possessive form of Nouns. 'J 
 
 XVIH. Adverl.s f 
 
 ;; XIX. Phra«os ".'.'.' ''^'^^ ^['.'.W 4!! 
 
 v"^'^" ^'^J^'"''^''^ »»<! Ad verbial'r h'rnses.' 4(} 
 
 J\r, ^^'^^''^"^ ^^''^oncoii with Vhvwcs 48 
 
 ^^ XM I. Nouns in Apposition ^ 
 
 « "V^J ' ^" ^^^^'^ ^^'^'' Objects 51 
 
 t« -^'XIV. Review ofNouns r,i 
 
 XXV. Pronouns ' . 
 
 " XXVI. Relative Pronouns "..'.......... oq 
 
 ^^ XXVII, Verbs-Simple TcnscH. , . ^'.. 
 
 ^™- Voibs-For,..tion of the Past Tcn^ei.V.V."" (S ' 
 ^^ -^'"^IX. Verbf^-Compound Ten.«e3... f 
 
 XXX. Verbs with Pronouns JA 
 
 XXXi. Moods of Verbs " '. '. -" 
 
 X^CXII. Pns.sive Verbs Ir 
 
 XXXh'I. Irre-ular Verbs. ..".!".!'.".*. .".'.".".*.' -7 
 
 XXXIV. Phrases with Participles '...'.".. 79 
 
 « 
 
 ■m 
 
 Mi 
 
 ; fij 
 
 lip 
 
^j CONTENTS. 
 
 Lksson XXXV. Conjunctions ... »1 
 
 '* XX XV [. Review TiMson ^•'> 
 
 •' XXXVII. Analysis of Simple Scntoncpfk ^'' 
 
 •• XXXVili. Analysis-Kiilarsed Su])joct 80 
 
 • " XX XIX. Analysis— Kular^'od I'rcdicalo IM 
 
 " X li. Iloview of Punctuation '.'U 
 
 " XLI. Kovicw of ]\Ialcin;L; Siiiiple Sentences ".•4 
 
 •« XI. 11. Construction of Nouns '.'7 
 
 •« XLI II. How to Parse Nouns KX) 
 
 " XI>1V. Construction of Adjectives 102 
 
 «« XLV. Misused Adjectives 1<)5 
 
 •• XLVI. Asrccnicnt of Verbs 107 
 
 «• X LVll. Verbs with Two Subjects 100 
 
 «• XLVllI. "Tiierc is" and "There arc" Ill 
 
 " Xl.IX. Syntax of Pronouns 11:5 
 
 •♦ L. Syntax of Adverbs 118 
 
 •« LI. Coinjionnd Sentences 1'JO 
 
 •• LIf. Analysis of Compound Sentences J'J3 
 
 •« 1,111. Makin.u; Compound Sentences 124 
 
 •« LIV. Comi)lex Sentences 127 
 
 «< LV. Analysis of Comidex Scjitences 1151 
 
 " LVl. Expanding and Contnictin-; Sentences lo2 
 
 Ml.-5C'KI,LANKOU8 EXERCISKS IN COMI'DHITION 13(5 
 
 bL'PPLEMENT 145 
 
 
 If 
 
 ('i 
 
ir: 
 
 -SI 
 
 «:'. 
 
 w; 
 
 80 
 
 m 
 
 U'J 
 
 :c.s \y\ 
 
 !)7 
 
 lUO 
 
 102 
 
 1()5 
 
 107 
 
 10?) 
 
 Ill 
 
 li;{ 
 
 lis 
 
 120 
 
 123 
 
 124 
 
 127 
 
 i:il 
 
 I ices lo2 
 
 13(5 
 
 UB 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSOIS. 
 
 J- INTliODUCTOUY. 
 
 l„Tl;l'r7 " ""' "> "« -""""■>" to m»,„or, .„t to .. roa„ ,,„,„ 
 
 1. We liavc Icarnocl to s,,cnlc the E.KHish Ian 
 ^nn..e .,0 as to understand what other, /ay to , " 
 -I ^to n.al<e other. „„der.s,an„ .hat J ^y I 
 
 2. Wo can not only s,,eak o„rhi„g„a,vo hut we 
 
 ..vo made ..o„>e „r„,..o.s., i„ wri.lng't. ' Vo may 
 
 Lave wr„te„ letters and .short co,„,,„°sitio„.s ' 
 
 tJi ^"' '""■,'''"'":^ ■•""1 compositions are not per- 
 eni>itals , we often emj.Ioy the wront; word or we 
 ;^o-t put the right words to,,ethe;.i,:;,t:j: 
 
 4. The mo.-t useful knowledije tliat we can ae 
 nu.re .„ sehool is the knowledge, in the Tst , a t 
 
 to TJ- U T' '" '"'■'•"■' ^^'■"'"^' -'''^t «-e have 
 
 10 bay; tlion liow to say it so fl>..f ,fi 
 
 ^/ J I •^ '^^' iii.il others nnv •>/« 
 
 III 
 
 books 
 not be our 
 
 iJgaziiies 
 'ness 
 
 and 
 
 rcvssaiwihiic.uHllenccMhrou.ri, 
 
 nows|,M|)crs. ]^oiv, it 
 
 III 
 
 occasion to liandlu tl 
 
 to write; yet wo sL:;!l all h. 
 
 ive 
 
 lett 
 
 crs to our frieiula. 
 
 i^^ pen, even if we only writo 
 
 wi 
 
2 
 
 LANOUAOE LLftSONS. 
 
 G. Itiw iK-t very diflleiill for n |;ii})i] to Icnrn to 
 speak and to write correctly and clearly. And if 
 you will faithfully work out the exercises liere 
 given, you Mill be able to ex])rfss yourselves cor- 
 rectly, botli witli tlie ton,L;ue and with tlie i>en. 
 
 7. The study tliat tcaclies ns to nse the English 
 lano-iinf^e correctly in speaking and in writing is 
 called English grammar. 
 
 I 
 
 II. THE SENTENCE. 
 
 Tlio loaf^hor will dict.ito, aiiJ tlio pupils will wrilo on slatos or on 
 papor, tbi) following ytory : 
 
 Two ynnnt,' boars left tlicir uiitivo woods. Tlicy caino to a hee- 
 liivo wftll sloicd witli iMiiioy. At this disooxoi y tlio. bfars were 
 <;reatly do!i;j;litoil. They hastily ovortiinu'd the liivo. Tliey 
 l)0^'aii to eat v()i'ai'it)iisly. Tlie Ikts. liowovcr, \voro uot to bo dc- 
 ]>rived of tlio friiils of tlioir labor ^vitll imiiunity. Thov flew 
 jiboiit the bears. They stuiij; them scvoioly in thci ears and eyes. 
 The boaiN tried in vain to rejiel the attacks of t,h<!ir nimble foes. 
 11 ley were at last fjrced to refloat, niaddoned with pain a.nd 
 blinded l)y ra^e. l^.lt after n. wiiile their snl"ferin,i,'s snbsid('<l. 
 They had leisiiro to reflect n]ion tlieir enndnct. and re.solved to 
 pititit by their siui exi)erience. rioiisnuo id often bouyht with 
 pain. 
 
 1. In the story that you liave co])ied there are 
 two things to be noticed — 
 
 I. The ])iece >a marked off into separate state- 
 ments by a i)unctuation mark called the 2^crio(I, or 
 full stop. 
 
 II. The first word of each statement begins with 
 a capltidletter. 
 
 "1. DiiiECTioN. — Begin every statement with 
 a capital letter, anW. end it with a period. 
 
 Change pai)«rs, an*' sec if Lliis has been correctly done. 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
Intofl or on 
 
 ON SENTKXCK.S. -J 
 
 3. Kach of ih.j«e scpunUo statements is called a 
 sentence. 
 
 In the oopicl story, nu.nbor tho sontonccs l, ?. 3 otc What u .» « 
 flm sentence? ThoseoonU? Tho thinl •.• .tc ^v hat Is tLo 
 
 4. Dkfixition.-A sentence is a set of 
 words making a complete statc.aent. 
 
 5. A sentence is made up of loonh ; bnt not u'oMs 
 tlirown togctlier at random. 
 
 G. " The air that ^^'e hreatho," is not a sniU-nee 
 beeause the wonis do not n,a!a. a eon.plete s.utJ 
 
 jnont._Theymigi,t.n.i.,l,omadeintoasent!l 
 ;'ysay.ng"Thoairthatwe]>,..nthe is s^veet," or 
 ihe an- t.iat we breathe is a fluid." 
 
 7. Is tliis a sentence ? 
 
 Little drops of H-atn..,liH,,^.,.,,i„,,,f^,^,^^^^ 
 Make the mighty ocean an<l the pleasant hmd. 
 
 8. Is this a sentence? 
 
 Full many a gem of purest ray serene . 
 
 Insort such wonls In tho foUowing a. wiK ',..,.. n..,„ ..„,'„,, . 
 
 1. In 1-492 Columbus « a,, ,., 
 
 ia o ., , ; , •"• ^'"' lite or a fanner 
 
 ^ • •^- A band of robbers 4 tIw. ct 
 
 of Robinson Crusoe ^ n' ^\/''^^;tory 
 
 ronto fi Ti ^'''^ '"'ty ^^ To. 
 
 : 1 ~' ^*-T^^^^'"^P'i-^ of China . 7 Tho 
 
 f^tudy of Grammar .8 u-.. .. 
 
 • .„ ^^'^«'>.^'i"<'at patrot. 
 
 '• — '^'''' '''''^' ''' i^^ t;H3 largest city ia 
 
 rid. 11. 
 
 ■tells us tho time of (b- 
 
 'y 
 
 NOTR TO TKACirKUS.-Tho 1 
 
 of th> 
 
 tho 
 
 ■'' xrnlciK-e. 
 work of f)no or 
 
 It will ;iNo ho f,w,,„l 7..., , -''^'^ .^" 
 
 ■<o 1)0 found ;i vaiii.il 
 
 iiKiy hn 
 nntiivrj 
 
 )if' OXClcisO to |,i;, 
 
 "<i!i\ 01 oiio or iiioi'o i>i-.,;i ..1 . '"> '"^'-iciso 10 I 
 
 ba.isof class^JriS.''' '" *''' ^'^"^'^•^^^"'^b aud mal 
 
 t'O 
 
 ."I'j 
 
 ^ 51,1 
 
 
 in' it 
 
LANGUAUli I.liS.SoNK, 
 
 111 SUBJECT AND J'UKDICATE. 
 
 1. In every sentence tlicre are two important 
 tilings to be noticed — 
 
 I. That tliere is sometlii))'/ sOdtj/. 
 II. Tliat there is sometliijig naineti abvut icliivh 
 the Ktateiueiit is made. 
 
 Birds fly. 
 
 Here tlic tJimr/ stated is denoted by tlie word 
 " lly." The tiling (ihoiit widck the statement is 
 made is denoted by the word " bird." 
 
 In tlic following Bcntoncos toll who or wjiat i? MpoUen about, and 
 wbat is tho thing stati:i). 
 
 1. Columbus discovered America. 
 
 2. Leaves have their time to fall. 
 
 3. Iron is the most useful metal. 
 
 4. The lawyer hummed an old lovc-tunG. 
 
 5. The S(}uirrel eyes the browning chestnuts. 
 
 'J. Dj:finitions. — The name of the person or 
 thing about which the statement is made is 
 called the subject. 
 
 The word or words used in making the 
 statement are called the predicate. 
 
 4. Every sentence must contain a subject and a 
 predicate, because every sentence must be a state- 
 ment. 
 
 N.B. — The question " Who {or what) is mention' 
 
 as its answer. 
 
 'yi 
 
 '.!• 
 
 And " WJiat is said of the sidiject?'''' will give the 
 predicate. 
 
E. 
 
 injtorl.'iiit 
 
 MiL ic/tich 
 
 Jiiient is 
 I about, and 
 
 no. 
 
 
 stunts 
 
 
 erson 
 
 or 
 
 ■nade 
 
 is 
 
 ing tiie 
 
 ect and a 
 a stato- 
 
 mention- 
 
 5 answer. 
 
 give the 
 
 RtJlUlCCT AND I'JIKDICATK. 5 
 
 r>.V means of those questions fin.I „ut the .Suhkcts 
 ":^/ '•^^^^-'^^- in the exan^ples given above ' 
 
 8u.t«.t« moaning; aB, A dog worrk.l a m : P'-«<l'cato that 
 
 Subjects 
 
 le 
 
 1 doctor: ti,otc:;d;o;!'tif;i!;Si,Sr"^^'''"'^'''"' 
 
 Predicates. { a nest, ni,s,;t tlm\4d- V ... '7,'"' ''"'- '"■'" 
 I files u lion,,, -i] ''t^ji'"!'] ^ ^"'J ^l''' n.a„, trnn- 
 
 Supply Bultablo eiil,j.>ot8. 
 
 _ 1 revolves around tlic snn in a ^■(.,•,r o 
 
 IS the season of snow and ice. ;}. -__1 ,,;. :{,,,^,„ 
 over the snow in slodf-cs 4 /-^ •'« n.mn 
 
 , .,, . '"'H(i.,cs. 4 suffer tcrrbv in 
 
 battle. 5 -isthe^capitalof Ontario. 6 sail 
 
 wrote her exer- 
 
 arross the i\tln„tic Ocean. 7. 
 else. 
 
 Si :'l>ly8ultal.Io r>rpdlrntf>(i : 
 
 1. London . o. QQr^\ 
 
 music . 4. Vessels —l 
 
 the Nile . 6. The Children 
 
 — • 3. Sounds of 
 <>. The source of 
 
 Exercise I. 
 A. 
 
 Write a ^^'ntence on each of thefoljowin.^ uords 
 Inihrlne all the wo7-.l« I'n >i i • , >^oI(lfi 
 
 underline nl \ ^^oils in the subject, and douhhj 
 undc', line all the wo^d. m the j^redicate. 
 
 MoDKL. Smoke. The_ smoke curls up from the 
 chimney. 
 
 Steam 
 
 1. Smoke. 2. Desk. 8. A 
 ■engine. 6. Tiio Kagle. 
 
 Change papers, 
 wctiy uudorliueO, 
 
 ir 
 
 Hook 
 
 JMon 
 
 Tl 
 
 Id 
 
 and BOO if the aubjocus and ptcdi 
 
 '^y. 8. Girls. 
 
 
 rffl 
 
 icatfs are t•o^ 
 
6 L.'iNGUA(JK l.K.SKONH. 
 
 B. 
 
 C()m|ioso 'wo or more sentences upon e;ic]i of tho 
 following subjects: 
 
 1. Cotton. 2. Do- 3. Flowers. 
 
 Let Uieso sontoncc? bo writt.'ii on tlio li;,T'K1;oar.|, n.v<\ ho. made the 
 bHBis of class-.Titirisni. Coiro'^t ficconliiifj tollic folhnvMiKdirootioiiB : 
 
 1. Draw II line under each niissjtelied Avord. 
 
 2. Draw a line through each small letter that 
 nlinuld he a ea])ital, or eaj)ilal that should bo small. 
 
 '•I. ^lark a eros!^ where a pei-jod is omlttefl. 
 NoTK TO TKAniKHs-Tlie iii.'iticT of siil>i'Tt ;uid proili.-atc 
 
 Hlioill.l not lM>l..|t llll'll it )^j:r,-,;rll;/ IIII.lcrMund ))_>■ CVCrV IK'^'li. 
 iHTol tin; I'hss. Ol o.iiiso, ;itl.liis ,Kt,;i-.\ n,. iitteiiiiit 'is to l.{ 
 iiindotodisoniimiatio between Knimm;iu.;,l and Ir^-ical subiccl 
 fUiG p;r:di(.'iito. •' 
 
 IV. A IJ':;S,S(.)N iX CKITICISING. 
 
 1. AVe are now to t;ike a lesson in crUldsinf/ ?>{i\\ 
 tencos, which means i)ointing out their faults. 
 
 2. To show the paj.il how this is done, we shall 
 take a number of examjdes from the last exercise as 
 written by a class of young seholars. [Sec the sub- 
 jects in Exercise 1, page 5.] 
 
 Examine 1. — Tin-: Doc,. 
 
 The dog runs f.'.st. The dog got runed ovct by 
 a cart. The dog got out of the jjound. 
 
 T<Mi 
 
 t fin's exereisf> is not well rl 
 
 one. 
 
 riKi, each .«en- 
 
 torice lic^'iiis mIM 
 
 writer sfiys " tii.- .lo-r ,i:ot riivetl over." 'Dioro 'is iio'siid 
 
 cnpifil, and onds wiMi a jieriod. Hut the 
 
 aH iiwfd. He iiieoiit tliat tlio do;j ?/y?.-? r 
 l)ej,ni)s with tho .same words—" tlie di 
 ki the eui! 
 
 m\ over, 
 
 Eacl 
 
 word 
 
 I K(Miteni'(i 
 
 til is id uot a^'rccubie 
 
I: 
 
 r.KMf.ONfi ox rniTirisivo. 7 
 
 Aao,n;i.sar{„:,]n,>....i u-iih four lo^s son.o dor,g 
 
 '"•-veryu-ihl,:,,! ..,„>,. ;mt not wil,l so,,,,, .lo.rs do 
 l)')t like to l,r ti.Ml ;.lM;,y. -^ 
 
 lI'Tc tlifi writer lius tlirco sciiU'iu'Os f,,r f,,, .. ., 
 
 '■Ue .lutoiuents : vot tlu-M. , . i '■"" ^'"'"'^ ''''''* 
 
 A (log is a quadruptMl with four lo^ir.s. Sonio ao..s 
 are very wil.l, an<l sonn. are not uihl. 8on.o cIo^b 
 <Io not like to bo tied all dav. ° 
 
 r^il!:a:;ii!:Z.H;;;f^^ > ^"^ -^'^ -ca tl. „.,.. say -u quad. 
 
 m 
 
 Exami^U 3.— Tin.: I)„g. 
 
 I have had some dogs that I l,ave been very fond 
 of. Once I hud a big Neu-foundhuHl Do.. \U 
 would take my Lancli to school. Xow I lave -, 
 lutle Dog that u-ill fetch me the newspaper when I 
 send Imn aftei- it. 
 
 "du-"is written t^vh^e ■ ,/ r ^ , ' "/ ''>"" ''■^■"'^^- '''1'^ ^v<).•.I 
 
 Kr.MAUIv 'I'll 'I'HK PrT>iiu "iin 
 
 tors, or i„ tho <.nu; o . ' tff ' 'f-,"';;"^''^ "/^'^ of capital lot. 
 will ..rely t,y u, do , ) vc'; 1, . r """'' "' ^■""""-"I'iu.o. iu„ 
 
 }f;i 
 
 Correct tlie foil. 
 
 ii^xercise 2. 
 
 wing witli roferonoe to— • 
 
 1. Spelling. 2. Capitals. 8. Tlie I^ 
 
 thing else tlia 
 
 orioi 
 
 ^ fit'einH to n(>ed correction. 
 
 1. 4. Any- 
 
° r.ANOnAOE I.nsfiONR. 
 
 1. Soiiif i1..ja nm very nicn pome nro vcrv iiKpful tlno^nn.. 
 go,«i w,a.l, ,.t „i.-l,t they koi.,, all |„tr,„ aw,"'i™, ,|,„'wu"o 
 
 i-woS;*-;'?,;; :;■',;;,;;:;;': '""" ^ ■■-""■>' '"" i'-™- « « i d»6 
 
 3. TliO .1,.;; ia very prcty lIuV very Klva-o Iln is very larRe. 
 
 8. Tho Eaglo is a lars Bird. A ea-le flys liiyh. 
 better than btea.u boats some people like tl'le stcJuXat tiJl 
 
 V. SUBJECT AKD PREDICATE AGAIN. 
 
 Birds fly. 
 Fishes swim. 
 Carthage felh 
 
 1. Are the words « birds fly " a sentence ? Yen 
 because they make a statement, and liave a subject 
 and a predicate. What is tlie subject? The i.iLt.i. 
 cate ? 
 
 2. Are these words a sentence ?— « Fishes swim." 
 Name the subject. The predicate. 
 
«nnjKnT AND rR,,r>irATK aoatx. 
 
 9 
 
 Give the Huhject. The predicate. ^ 
 
 ^ *!• lii t'acli of tlu'.so Hontcncos the m,).; 
 
 tence/ ^ coords be a seti^ 
 
 -lied the «;„,/,,„ ,j,::,;; ■;■''' ''-I'-i'-to ,,,,,,,,„ 
 
 pro.licatJ^ '"'""" '•'"''"•^"'' «,. with the 
 
 ir.r.t-STitATiox. 
 !• Birtis fly. 
 
 T'lis la a spiitoiiop uin. ,. 
 Plo prodic-ate. •. ll^^^""' " -"P>o .ubjoo, " blnl.V and a Bin,. 
 
 ^- ^Vwe birds fly ,v/,//^/y 
 nero the woids '< »f .. ' '^ '^"'.^'1/. 
 
 ^•^ry " to tlic last 
 
 of 
 
 l>'''^'y " are ad 
 
 predicate. 
 
 4. -Vrjme birds of 
 
 victim 
 
 Hero t 
 
 ditional words 
 
 w^i^A /if verij swiftlj to th 
 i^>ject and the pred 
 
 ^•'f-d to U.0 Ja8t 8ul,jcot.. 
 
 ^7/' ^''^^'''*'^''/ sccnred ih 
 
 ma 
 
 '>"</• i'id.v^j;. 
 
 (iir 
 
 i«'te arc c.„;„A,„, i,j, ,„,„,j, ^_ 
 
 tlii 
 
10 
 
 LA.VflTTAOK T.r.SSONS. 
 
 8. Jii (li(i III 1 loiMi) of tliestMilciK.'o, "^liirds" is tlio 
 KubJL'ct, and '' U^^^ " is the {.redioate. In tlio fourlli 
 form, the snhject is "soup' luids of j.iH'y, huviiii^sc- 
 C'uriM] tlii'ir virfiiii," aiiil the I'l-cclic-alo is " lly wilii il 
 very swiftly to tlii-ir nests." 'I'he first sentence is 
 nif/ij>lc; till! other sentences iwv tnkn-tjud. 
 
 »Su?)Ject. Predicate. 
 
 1. IMnls fly. 
 
 iJ. Some l)ii<l8 lly t;\vift)y. 
 
 \ Soiuo birds of Mroy lly very swiltly. 
 
 Some birds of prey, luvviii;; 
 sooiu'od tliuii' vit'lim, lly willi U very swiftly to thou 
 
 in llko iiiftiiiR\i, onlarp* tlio followiiif! siiitoiicfii till you niako thom 
 H-s luii^' iiu yuu can. Ito ijuioiul lu Imvo only tuio iit.l)joi;l uinl oao pro 
 dicalo : 
 
 1. lioys Study, li. Rivers flow. 3. A horse ran. 
 
 9. The lirincipal word in tlio subject of a sentence 
 is a 7unue-wonI, because it represents the tlii!i^» 
 named; tlie i)rincij)al word in the jiredicate is a 
 statement-word, lu'cause it represents tlie tliiuL"; 
 stated. Name-words are called '/ic>?^/i6- / stataiietit- 
 words are called verbs, 
 
 lu. There are thousands of nouns in our Luiirua"'e, 
 aiid also thousands of verbs. When we take .all 
 the words in our laiiLMnii^i', we find that we can 
 as.sort them n '^ n few gi'cat classes. We shall 
 st'c that all I: ,ii h 'voi-ds m;iy be n'rouped 
 into eujhl cla.s.'-o.s, r.d Uiese diiTi-vnt sorts of >vords 
 are called in ^^\\'u)ii\\\i' parts <>/ .speech. Now, nouns 
 and ver])s are the two ]trincl))al parts of speeclj, bo- 
 oauso Avitli a noun an<1 a verb wc can n»ake a sen- 
 teuce. 
 
 I 
 
" is tho 
 t\)urlli 
 iviiii^ sc- 
 ; with it 
 iciicc is 
 
 to tlioit 
 
 iifik" thorn 
 
 ill OIU! J)10 
 
 rse r;in. 
 
 iiiitence 
 u tliiru* 
 itu is ;i 
 a tliiiiL' 
 itcineitU 
 
 .;iUc' .'ill 
 we can 
 'o shall 
 ;'roii|H'(l 
 f words 
 , notins 
 i>c]i, 1*0- 
 .'i KJ^n- 
 
 i^'M'H ((r Wl.Kf.S. 
 
 lixcrcisc 3. 
 A. 
 
 11 
 
 n.ns. 5. A l.onl ..' ...nio " n .V' ''• *""" '" " '"•■"'""^' '•'^'^r 
 iivcdinatuU ' ' ^" '""•^ '''•^•' ^'i-" -• tho wall ;, „;. ' 
 
 I^ 
 
 Writo a sontcju'c oiM..v.h of n,,. MJ ■ 
 -V'"'»Wi„ti,oi„.,.,li,.,,„.(v,.'l, ' "'^■'"■'"- 
 
 CI.;) 
 
 1. Faro. 
 
 '-'itc (voib). 
 
 -. V ru('<i(j;U.. 
 
 o. 
 
 ^"vijiir. 
 
 f K"K.o l,..in. with ;i ca,.it';i V n m ^ '"""^'' ""'■'' '^^•"• 
 
 tliatyou can ,„;.ke. ^ ^ ''^'''''' '"'I'^'^v 
 
 ojucuta 
 
 Vr.-KT?Nq),s OF WOJiDS. 
 
 I. Nours.— Wliatcvrr v.t cop *]„• k - 
 ='-"Jtl.in,,r about, l>as a narno an. *•' , "' ''^ 
 
 I Tain lit 
 
 .VA:>.H'LKS.-yy^/^, ?//7.;^f7, 
 
 noun 
 
 o", St. La 
 
 MTt'jie 
 
 «', suf/'fr, rosc\ 
 
 2>((ifh 
 
 virtue, (joodiK 
 
 •'•''5 vnadonu h 
 
 hanica uro uouiis. 
 
 t', .ToKc].]), i/an-iot, 1/ 
 ' ^>''"^cry. Xow, all tlie 
 
 !irr 
 
 
 #i 
 
 I 
 
 : I 
 
12 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSOiNS. 
 
 2. Verbs. — ^But we cnnnot speak about a tlnn;j; 
 williout using another kind of word cnlled a verb, to 
 express what we mean in regard to tlie thing named : 
 
 A desk stands. Thunder roars. London is a 
 city. Temperance brings liealth. Jolin heat James. 
 
 In tho following Bcntoiiccs, write tbo nouns in one colunni anil tho 
 verbH in fvnother : 
 
 1. Ilnin falls. 2. Smoke rises. 3. Joliu brolic the window. 
 4. Tlie Tlianics flows. 5. I'aris is a city. (5. Lucy visited 
 Thomas. 7. The sun shires. 8. The to;iolicr ;;avc a holiday. 
 U liobert spins a top, 10. Mary ])layod ii f^.'inie. 
 
 3. Adjectives. — A mere name is not always a 
 sufficiently definite sign of the meaning of a noun. 
 Other words, called adjectives, are sometimes 
 joined to it to denote colour, shape, size, kind, quan- 
 tity, etc. : 
 
 A blue tie. A black dog. A inhite swan. 
 
 A small letter. A capital letter. A round table. 
 A_;^;?cpear. A .s?rcc^ apple. 7Vcw^?/ dollars. 
 
 Underline tho adjcctivoH in tho following sontcnoos : 
 1. The man stole a brown inuiT. 2. A tine bmwn liorso won 
 the loti;^ race. 'A. Many persons saw it. 4. I'lcas.-mt weather 
 ni.'ikes us clieerfnl. h. Swoot sleep brings fairy dreams. 6. 
 Three sunny days have followed two gloomy ones. 
 
 4. Adverbs. — A fuller meaning is often given 
 to the verb, and also to tlie adjective, by the use of 
 words called adverbs, to express time, place, man- 
 ner, and degree : 
 
 He called yesterday. Go quicJdy. lie will be 
 here to-day. She sang sweetly. Uichatd was very 
 angry, lie was exceedingly sorry. 
 
 Underline tlio adverbs in tho following pcntcnces : 
 1. Try again. 2. Write carefully. 3. You will soon learn. 
 4. She beliaves well. 5. It is very easy. 6. Step backward. 
 7. Nobody really trios to write carelessly. 
 
KmCS OF WOUKS. 
 
 13 
 
 S. Pronouns.-A ccrtui,, kind of word nnv 1,« 
 n^<;drn.teadoianonn: namely a pronO n T 
 l>nncij,ul j.ro„oun« arc ; P^onOun. iho 
 
 I--me, We-us, 
 
 He-him, Thou or you^You, 
 
 She-her, They-them, 
 
 i. i Jove a rose. 2. Do von ? q if 
 6. Prepositions.-Ccrtnin woras nro „se,l ,„ 
 
 He placed the boxes on tlio mrf v^ 
 i<ie time. Slie runs across the field 
 
 Undorline the propositions i„t,ofonowi,„somonco.. 
 
 «<!iiiiiK. 4. iio ,.,, , •*■ "" ''■■veil Ml tliepmlcn liil 
 
 ". 1 Ml (lew IS on tlic <,n';iss. 
 
 ccsaiyto^oiM them by means of a coniunrtinn 
 such as and, but, either, or, if. ^°"J^nct,on, 
 
 Uuderlino the conjunctionH in the foHowing .cntonce« : 
 coidd 
 
 A cat and a dog played prettily on tl, 
 write pretty well, l)„t !,e conhl 
 
 «^- Wesliall improve it if 
 wardiniist -,'0 10 the f, 
 
 e floor, 2. Tlic boy 
 not read very nicely. 
 
 curt. G. T 
 
 irni 
 
 we study. 4. Kitliet Cliarl 
 
 Joini' 
 
 I OS or I'M- 
 
 orr 18 human, b.U to forgive i« divine 
 
 niiclo owns a horse aud 
 
 t 
 
 I I 
 
 I ; 1 
 
14 
 
 LANGUAGli; LKKSONrf. 
 
 8. Interjections.— Certain words may stand 
 aluiic to express .siii-prise, disgust, etc. : 
 
 Oh!\H Julin lierc ! Ah! I wisli l,e had come bo 
 tore. Tliese are cidled interjections. 
 
 Tlie writttMi or printed .sign of an interjection or excliwcution 
 I"! 
 
 Exercise 4.' 
 
 Xaine tlio Jcinds ofzoords in tJie following, tluis ; 
 
 Manyj^;irl8 ijvnd l.nvH \ rim ;(iui.kly,LlinMi!;irtIic, ionon .'iito. 
 Adj. |xNounl(;on;Noui.lV.,Tb! Adv. | iTri,: lA.ljJA.Ij. j^ouli. 
 
 1. A ];nrse and a doi^r iniiko ^dod coiiipaiiidns. 
 
 2. Thoy clicor tlio weary travoilor on a Ion,!,' jdiirney. 
 ;<. (»li ! do you see tlio [xxir !-tarviI;.^' l,CL;L;ar V 
 
 4. (uve liim a onist of bread Ironi tlu; jiaiiCry. 
 
 5. The.slieopsooji readied tlio river, Ijiit ivfused to eroas. 
 
 0. Slio is far fmni tlio laud where lior yomi;,' liero hIocus 
 And lovers around her are si';hiiii,^ ; 
 lUti coldly she tarns from their ;;aze| and weeps 
 J?or her heart in his j;rave is lyin-. -Thomas Mookr. 
 
 VII. XOUNS. 
 
 NoTK TO Ti:.\fiiK!;s.-The kind and the (|nantity of (Irili in 
 ndiina rnqnivrd for yonn- jcholars will d. rend on tlieir previc ns 
 tniiuinf;. If no oral traiiiini; has been -iven, the teaehor sliould 
 uiako tlio pupil.s name the nouns in their reading,' lossona. 
 
 1. Defimtions.— A noun is a. word used as 
 the name of anything that v/e speak about. 
 
 Kxampm:s.— JA//?, doy, servant, (Jharles. 
 
 Jv.rpUuHilion. — Tlicso .'ire names of ^^trson*. 
 All names of persons arc nouns. 
 
 E.YA:MrbE.s. — J)of/, horse, cow, cat, antelope, 
 
 Ji.vplanatioyi.—TlwAd are names of anlmaU, 
 All names of animals are nouns. 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 IS 
 
 Exam rues.- 7b..;,, street, city, church. 
 
 iijimcs of pluc'.s aro ;ta^^/w. 
 
 All na„u.s of thi,,., are nolens. 
 -• -t^i^'^-e-'uv throe kinds of nouns-— 
 
 a l)iiK,N.T,ox._A proper noun is a word 
 used as the nan.e of some particular person 
 animal, place or tliin- ■,. / /, I,, ' 
 
 ,1 . , "■ I'rap^r name is .'i purson or 
 
 tiling's oioii mime. ' 
 
 ■i- l'.-..per ,iou„,s alwuys I,egi„ ^itl, capital.. 
 
 ^. Dei„.v„.,o.^._A common noun is a word 
 that may be used as the name of each tTanf 
 out of some class of things of the same sor" 
 M, man, hoy, country, oily. ^ ' 
 
 J'.tX^^^'^"' "°"" '" ~^' "^'"^ of a quality 
 
 .«,'r^^i'°"»s »»"•«"- .-... .1.0 ..„u„.. T,.„;.cM„„ .:,';„ ,„„„ 
 
 1. The boA's are in seln^ol o i-'i i 
 
 ^lomi tlie trJe 8 T' ' ^ '^ .i^-.'n-'lcnor cut 
 
 4 Tl.n • ''"' '■^'^'•'^ ^" themornin- 
 
 In th<!"f oil. ! ■'''^"^^•^'"ics we sImj, a sea. 
 
 ,h,ni!'^;;ll';'i::!"""''^''*'!'='"'-f^v^^'i''ri"...o.,,,,. 
 
 N 
 Mo 
 
 irgestcitvini! 
 
 ow Yoi-lv to San L 
 "iitains. 4. We 
 
 n? vvoria. 8. I 
 
 " L''<'inLr I'l 
 
 OHl 
 
 clay. 5 Coal, iron, and oth., „.„er 
 troni Nova Scotia. 0. TJie boy tol 
 
 '•iiiciseo, we crosse.I thelJoeic- 
 'i'-C'.J^^oiiigtoOttawanextSatur- 
 icr minerals, are obt.ained 
 
 tl a falsehood. 
 
 tm 
 
 m i 
 
16 
 
 LANGUAGE LI3RKON6. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 A. 
 
 Mention the names of things •— . 
 1. In the school-room. 4." Name persons you know. 
 ^. In the ,.l.y-gn,und. 5. Places you have seen o, 
 •i. In the street. lieard of. 
 
 pripor!''"'^' ^' '^'' '"^"'^« yo" "«vo juHt t'ivon arc oo„„non and which 
 
 1. Tlie bee is on Hie flowfjp o ti,„ t • , 
 3. The oat will be in o Titohen 1 ri I T' '" "'? *'••^'^• 
 kennel. 5. The horses are i tl ufst-vb^e t 'n^ )"''" "' '"'^ 
 m his den. 7. Wlioro -iV l.o i , ? o" J',."'*' ^^^'^"^ >™""e< 
 mountain. 9. The ioat uitSS ^^^"J^''* ?. «• ."«»ry ran np the 
 TlH! oak bears ucorni' 11 ^™ t''o. c iii,i ,„tn a djtdi/ ]o. 
 iri inFrance • si/oNn"^'"-"''''^'" 12. Paris 
 
 boy was noted fci- Ids candour ^ "ver is yre^it 1(J. The 
 
 Viri. VERBS. 
 1. 1)EPi^.riox.-Verbs are words, by means 
 ofwhichweare able to make an assertion 
 about something. 
 
 -. la sentences like these 
 
 JVIen Idughy 
 Fishes swmi, 
 ('anhairo ff'll^ 
 there is hut one wonl m eael/cf the predicates; and 
 as .n everysentence the word l,y means of which wo 
 .ire able to make an assertion tnust he a verb, the 
 words laugh," swim," and '' foil " are verbs. 
 
 o- In sentences like these 
 
 The buy airi^es the dog, 
 The child shu/s a song, 
 there are several words in the i)redicate. Now, in each 
 of these sentences the verb is the particular word used 
 
■^.tr- 
 
 VkiiiiH. 
 
 17 
 
 u know, 
 seen oi 
 
 and wiiioh 
 
 2r, coni- 
 
 tlio trco. 
 :is ill liis 
 :ir roared 
 ui up tho 
 t<;li. 10. 
 2. Palis 
 I'itt was 
 m. Tho 
 
 means 
 lertion 
 
 i"in;iI<i,,nril,o assertion. I„ tlu. f!..«f 
 
 P-ncato is "strikes the oj" ^ 
 
 " strikes •" I'n +1. . -. ^' ' ^''^' ^^-'^''^ s 
 
 a « ouii^, ana the verb is "kmhtv: » 
 
 4. Frequently there are many word. ;,. fi 
 cate. Tims— ^ " ^"^ l^'^'^lj. 
 
 Some birds of nm^r i,„ • 
 
 t^t-'w 18 ijie smgle M'ord "ily." 
 
 Name tho vorl.3 1,1 tho following sontonco«. 
 
 ^- iiie cnrno s the shin of n i -^ *^'y s^Mttly, 
 
 5,'irl sai,l, .. We a,: ::':l"' "•:?'■'• "• '^'"" ''"'o 
 
 around the (.nrtl, s «, 'i- /'""''""'"evolves 
 
 ..arth. 8. &tu,I,ous boye become learned 
 
 ,.>ii 
 
 Mi » 
 
 
 ?s ; and 
 ich wo 
 rl), tlie 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 A. 
 
 Addver^^tothefollowinrr: 
 
 1. The boy . 2. The ijirl 
 
 birds . 4. The clock - 
 
 TI 
 
 le sun 
 
 • 5. Kings 
 
 3. TJ.o 
 
 n each 
 a used 
 
 1. The 
 3. James 
 Iloaltli - 
 
 apph 
 
 hen 
 
 6. Loud 
 
 sour. 2. The 
 
 ffra 
 
 pes 
 
 yesterday. 4. Sohl 
 
 lers 
 
 on 
 
 '''• The lion 
 
 npe. 
 
 Jl 
 
1^ LAMUUAGi; I.HSSOiNS. 
 
 On N()i;.\s (f/id Vi:ui;.i. 
 1. NiDiit si.\ tI)in!.;H tli.il run. 
 
 •' U tt tt ^' 44 
 
 ~* f/roin. 
 
 '•i- '' " " " /mm 
 
 '1. ^W/ " " " jnnls (/e> 
 
 5. " " <' u liorscs « 
 
 6. « « « « (Iwirs " 
 
 C. 
 
 Wrlto ,1 soiitcncc oil ivioli of tho following «ul). 
 jVcts— (Irawinn^ oiio line under e:icli ?iou?i, and two 
 lines under eiieh ve?'/). 
 
 ]\[oDEL.-~T]ie polar War lives in Uio arctic rejrions. 
 
 1. Tho polar bear. 2. Ihe vainboM-. 3. My cousin. 
 
 (Change papora, anil corroct with roforntioo to : 
 
 J. Spcllinrr. 2. Ca})ita1s. r,. The |)eriod. 4. 
 
 Whether tho nouns and verbs are correctly under- 
 lined. 
 
 IX. T.KSSON OX NU.MBEK. 
 
 The river flows. 
 The rivers flow. 
 
 1. When we compare these two sentenc(!s, we see 
 that the noun in tlie first sentence is *' river; " in the 
 eocond, it is " rivers." 
 
 2. The word " river" gives the idea of one of the 
 things called rivers; but when we say " rivers," we 
 get UL idea of more than one. 
 
T.TfSSON riN Sniv.KK. 
 
 19 
 
 form of nouns or pronouns, by means nf 
 wh.chwe Show whether we '.r/.^eTu^:/,', 
 one of the things for which the noun stands 
 or of more than one. ""u.-,, 
 
 '"""Ijor, ,v),„.|, .|,,„„,,„, ,„„„, ,1,,,, „„e „l,J,,,t: 
 
 5 Ru, „;._Mo3t nouns form their plural bv 
 addmgA-to the singular; a. «,u,, st,u' ; ,' Z 
 
 Write tho plurfil of tlio following nouns : 
 
 1. PI .'lilt. 
 
 '2. l\uiiib()\v', 
 
 '^l ■\Va]!. 
 
 4. Danger. 
 
 T). Iioapor. 
 Ch SLTpcni. 
 7. Knell. 
 
 fe. C'liL'stniit. 
 
 0. Garden. 
 10. WlK'(.'ll)aiTou\ 
 H. AVator. 
 12. Aj)|.lo. 
 
 (( 
 
 Wo say, « TiKM-ivor flcnv^v," and 
 Wo say, "Thorivor6'ilo\v'." 
 
 7. We observe tliat wuli the .singular, « river " l].r> 
 n\ais, Uio verb lias not the a. 
 
 8. It is uot correct to say, '• Tl,orivcr>„." Nci- 
 tI.or 18 u correct to suy, " Tl.o river. >,..." 
 
 . ." -"^^e^^ " vcFD denotinp present 
 .me ts joined with a noun subject in fhc^ Lgu 
 W number the verb generally ends in . ,• but 
 when jomed wth a noun subject in the plura 
 nutnber, the verb Kenerolly omits the / 
 
 
 ..ii 
 
 ' ' il 
 
20 
 
 LANOlfAGI.: LKSSONfl. 
 
 10. The most iniportnTit i.rinciplc in the KiMhh 
 lan-unge is ll..'it tl.(. vorl, follows the number oi its 
 noun subject ; tliat i.s — 
 
 If the noun is singular, tlie verb must be singular. 
 If the noun is plural, tlie vi-rb must be plural. 
 
 11. Tliis is exi)ressea in the following 
 
 UvLK OF AciiKKMKNT.— A vcrb must agree 
 with its subject in number. 
 
 Tlie Jiorso works. 
 
 Here the verb « works " agrees in number with its 
 snbjeet, "iiorse." "Works" is singular because 
 " horse " is singuhar. 
 
 o' 
 
 The liorses work. 
 
 Here the verb « ^vork " agrees in num]>er with 
 " liorses." « Work " is plural because " liorses " is 
 l)lural. 
 
 Aro tho following soiitoncoa good EngliBh? 
 
 1. Some l)oys writes carefully. 2. Tho splendour 
 fall on castle walls. 3. The tops of the masts «;>- 
 pears above the horizon. 4. The houses nccils paint- 
 ing. 
 
 Write tho following sentence : 
 
 The brave soldier falls in battle. 
 
 Now write the sentence so as to make it say that 
 more them one brave soldier falls in battle. 
 
 Wi-ito tias sontt^nce; 
 
 The stars begin to twinkle. 
 Change it so as to make it s^^eak of but one star. 
 
21 
 
 In the foil 
 
 tlio J're<lt(:(tti\'<^ find d 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 -U'inc.scnto„c(.s,na,netho.'?,.^.,,,and 
 
 j\[ 
 
 ODKL 
 
 'V\ 
 
 '''l'l<,'(' tllLM'r NUM 
 
 IJKU 
 
 10 g.'ito of Die palace o] 
 
 )on.s. 
 
 hell 
 
 ^;J^'!^:^'r^''^'^^^^^--I-- 2. Tl.:. tinn.] 
 
 ovyovorthou-astoof u'.'iler.s. 3. Tl 
 
 10 school? 
 
 (TM 
 
 (V 
 
 ■■I'CM. in S,.,,u.,nl,..,.. •). ri,o .n;,tos. , " 
 
 V"le» against ,v,,nt l,y rn.kC,' 1,. ; ''V'™ ''':'"- 
 CMh'ingo lai-ois for corrections. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 w 
 
 X. IKUEGULAU XUMRKItS ' 
 noLf "' lot u. see the most irregular of .11 the 
 
 ^nffular. Plural, singular. 
 
 0} 
 
 Child. 
 
 W 
 
 Foot. 
 Gooise. 
 
 in. 
 Oman. 
 
 O.ven. 
 
 Child 
 
 u 
 w 
 
 ron. 
 
 on. 
 
 01 
 
 Mouse. 
 Tootli. 
 SI 
 
 nion. 
 'oot. 
 oo.so. 
 
 Doe 
 
 eep. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Mice. 
 
 TeetJj. 
 
 ■nny. 
 
 SI 
 D 
 
 leop. 
 
 'eui\ 
 
 fiaii 
 
"" LANOtTAr.K l.KRRONfl. 
 
 :i Wo liavo soon tl.:it tlio siiioular of vorl.s of 
 pmsent tiiiio goncrally cm.Is i., .., ;,„,] that it .liUVrs 
 Ironi the plural only in havii.ir t),,. .v. Is^.^v^ just 
 as then, are irr(-,ilar plurals <.r ^/o//;/.., so there "are 
 n few irrei'iilar ]>lurals of ?»a7As'. Thus— 
 
 The plural of /.s- is ^^^,^ 
 
 " " " '//vA.s is "vu^r^ 
 
 "^'''* 1'^ //«//K'. 
 
 4. As far as re,L;.ar(ls number m verhs, these arc 
 almost the only very irre|:r„]ar forms. Ho v(>ry 
 careful in every case to use the eoi-reet form of these 
 words— that is, the form that Avill make the verb 
 agree Avith its suhjoet in iiuini).^-. 
 
 E.VAMiM.K.-The senfeneo '^ Th<> ehihlrrn //./.sM.one 
 to school " is incorrect, because the vc-rb " h.-is " does 
 not agree in number with its Mi!,ji...t, '^children" 
 since " children " is plural, while '-"has'^ is singular. 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 A. 
 AVritc S(M>t(Mices intro.lucing man, vJuhl, penny, 
 ox, shce2>, and ironuin in i\w. plural ; and mice,f<^t, 
 teeth, sheep, gee^e, and pence in the sln>jular. 
 
 13. 
 
 Write these Rontenccs, changing the number of 
 the 710U71S and verbs. 
 
 Mo]>KL.— Dutifid children o])ey their parents. 
 Chanf/ed—A dutiful child obeys its parents. 
 
 Model.— My boy's tooth is decayed by eating 
 sweetmeats. Chanfjed—My boy's teeth are decayed 
 by eating bAveetiueats. 
 
 1. Mou aro iiiortnl. 
 
 2. SlH'ei) liuve v;ilii;i1)Io wool on tlicir hixoUs. 
 a. Ihe oxen tieutl out the oorn. 
 
'«*. 
 
 r V('rl»s of 
 I it (liffcrs 
 
 Now, jllHt 
 
 ..are. 
 
 the so nrc 
 
 Ho very 
 
 iiof tlioso 
 
 tlu' verb 
 
 /"'/.s' t_^onf> 
 ;is " (Iocs 
 
 en, 
 
 iiil.Ii 
 siiuriilar. 
 
 ice, feet, 
 r. 
 
 inltor of 
 
 I).ironts. 
 
 ." ofitiiic 
 ilooayod 
 
 <• An iKiIirsf; II, ■III is: il,,. ,. I '^ ^' "• 
 
 f;-:';^'-«'iuMiii;;';'t;:;|;:;.''''''''>'--^'!-.M!o«i. 
 
 I. ' '^^'"i'lHraiii.-MWii,,.,, ;„ 
 
 L'a 
 
 tics n, the ;..,,;./.,• or nour.s .,„<! of verbs. 
 
 "■-t first 1. <.,,;„;y;;;,;,';',;';'^ » "»''--''Mi.c y 
 
 «".7i'/ai-. "'• ■'"" '" "'<^' /-'"'W of a reri, tu iiialio it 
 
 "•r.USTKATIO.V. 
 
 4. ExDixa TN 8 IT V m w^ 
 
24 
 
 LANGUAGli Lli.SSONH. 
 
 j'lnral—^^hiHH-vH, huHli-cs, cliurch-rs, f 
 ;y/,/m/— pass, rush, Imicli, 1 
 rush-L's, lunc'li-cs, l>ux-i's. 
 
 OX-l'H. 
 
 Vfil 
 
 )S 
 
 X ; aOff/tdar—iKiHH-vH^ 
 
 6. Esuisr, IS ().— S,)„K. nouns an<l vorhs viu] 
 iM o lu-eccdfil by ;i cuiisuuaut take e before a.ld 
 
 ini' 
 
 '/ as; 
 
 *Si/if/ular. Cari'o 
 
 ' oirro-es. 
 
 , negro. J^lunU. Car.roes, 
 
 7V^<m/. I),), g„. SuH/ulnr. Does, goes. 
 
 aimmg ';;;£"' ""^ ''"^' "■" ^'"'"^^ "■« «"'i- '"^taiuc^ uf the kind 
 
 ^ C. ExniNr. lv rrri.: F souM).—.^r„st nou..s ending 
 m forfe form tlieir ].lural by changing tlie/or /I 
 into ud and adding 6-; as: 
 
 /lingular. Leaf, ^vife, thief. 7Y,,ra^. Leavea, 
 wives, thieves. 
 
 Exercise g. 
 A. 
 
 Change the number of the following nouns : 
 
 Write sentences making use of the following 
 verbs in both 7iufnders : ° 
 
 !»lS,'atJi;!';;kf.?i S\af' °'"^' "'"'^' '•™^' -"■»» 
 
' '■■"■■™" '•'"■'"'".N,; ..s. ,,,„,„^_ 
 
 
 ^H.A,.,m-KUCKITUrs,.V«ANKX„;,,„,, 
 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 The Exercise. 
 
 "■ "■■' •'^- """«' i.uz:::"- 
 
 The Letter of Crilicism. 
 HrnrSir, Toronto, Out, Mmv 1, nm 
 
 «.''■■"■"" "'•*"'°"'""""'^-«i«.n„„., s,„i„„ ,.,„„„„,,. 
 
 ri,oMv,i„. rf.'.-:?,, »■■;','.;;- tr'f.^';' ";? - ■" "- -.,, 
 
 niimbor. 
 To Mr. Kichard Meredith 
 
 Gould DiowD. 
 
 I ! 1 
 
 
 m 
 
'«K» 
 
 26 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 Another Model — The Exercise. 
 
 The uxtMj of tlie furiiier plows his field. Oxen 
 eiit grass. I set'ii a drove of oxcu the otlic day. 
 
 Mawy Jones. 
 Th(> Lclter. 
 i\Iisrt l'"lorom?c Nij;litin.i;.alo, — 
 My dear Teuclicr : 
 
 I do not find any mistakes in .siiclliiij; in Miiry Jones'a coiniiosl* 
 lion on "The Ox." 
 
 K.'i('li pontnticc ends with a pcriixl. 
 
 Itiit in tlio first Hontoncn Miss Jones .sayn, " oxen plow!^.'^ This 
 sliiHild 1)0 pldiv, accoidiii.L: to the toxl-hoolc, \vlili:h says tliat wliun 
 thf, siiliject in plnral the verb .sh(.iiild liave no is. 
 
 I thiidc the expression " I peon " is wron;^. I do not know why 
 it it* wrong ; but I should soy " I sdin." 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 Anne Hathaway. 
 
 r01NT8 IN THE ARUANT.KMKNT OF A LETTER. 
 
 The arrnnp^cinont of tlie parts of a letter is im- 
 portant. • The following points are, therefore, to be 
 iittonded to : 
 
 I. The /j/ri-ce where it is written, and the date. 
 Tho day, month, and year should bo pi von in full, 
 
 II. The fonn of A<Mrcss: as Sir, Dear Sir, ]My 
 dear Teacher, Dear Madam, according to circum- 
 
 stnnces. 
 
 'i'lte nnnio of tho person addressed may either precede the form 
 of address, as in Model 2, or it may come at the close (left hand- 
 uide), as in Model \. 
 
 III. The iiarratiue^ or letter proper. 
 
 Be careful to begin every new subject with a now pnraffrnph, 
 
 IV. I'he s u,h script ion : as Yours truly, Yours 
 faithfully, Your affectionate pupil, and then the 
 rmme of the writer. 
 
It i 
 
 . Oxen 
 " flay, 
 rones. 
 
 i coin|)osl' 
 
 05." This 
 tliut when 
 
 :now why 
 
 thaway. 
 rXKR. 
 
 ADJKCTIVKS. 
 
 Exercise lo. 
 
 27 
 
 I-et the pupils wrho. s],ort Compositions on (lio fol- 
 hJirds— Tlio Sun. 
 
 louiiijjpoiiita: " ^'-'""■""'iH. N(4i.'o iiaiLKiilaily tlu, f„i. 
 
 1. Spoiling. oca,,i,,K 3. The |K.n.„I. .,. Tl,. 
 n.l.s „t nouns. 5. TlKUorm. „f U.e vorbs. 
 Oilier imj)rovcments. 
 
 /■'"■^ Wild. p. is uio iiV i/''f '■■^''r'>' o.v....,„io„ is ;.,,. 
 trouble, xs the pnpil.s will t om. ■ Vj i n' /' -''''' ''^">"""t ^'f 
 t."ad,o.- „„ist ho vi i , r o t; . " ;":}'^ '•'■•■"••■■■'l-lo n...ult. tlm 
 
 •■:.VKi<n..Ks AUK c:oui T u x , '';;'; ''"""'•^'•'"■^- \\-nK.v thk 
 
 r IS Hu- 
 e, to be 
 
 late. 
 
 Sir, My 
 circuin- 
 
 >thp form 
 eft haiid- 
 
 Yours 
 icn the 
 
 XIII. ad.tectivp:s. 
 
 1. Thus far, the only kind of sentence that wo 
 really understand is tiiis : • 
 
 Flowers bloom. Water ripj.los. Art refines. 
 That is wc understand only about the si.uplo sul. 
 ct wlueh .H generally a noun, and about the sin. 
 pie predicate, which is a verb. 
 
 2. But it is often necessary to describe or limit 
 the nounm some way and nJ-^ t + n 
 
 nhm.f fi . . ^-i}) anaaL.o to tell somethinfj 
 
 about the statement made by the verb. 
 
 3. Thus, we may wish to say-Meaatl/al flowers 
 Woo^n ; or, l^eauti/^d ll^nyors bloon, ea/,. 
 
 ^i! 
 
 . 'i. 
 
28 
 
 LANnirAoii: rKssoNs. 
 
 tine. 
 
 4. Whoi.ovor we ou^^ny n won] to .Icsn-il 
 
 ising w],;a is calh.l an ii,lj 
 
 I'M It a iioiiri, wo tu'o i 
 
 »p or 
 
 lieaut 
 
 iiul " is an adjective. VV| 
 
 '"nij.loy a won] to doscriho or limit tl 
 
 I vorb, we are using ^h^t is ealled an 
 
 MI 
 
 b' 
 
 IK an adverb 
 
 iene\(')- wo 
 K' meaning,' of 
 
 •'>. Write tl 
 
 lesc senLeiuujj 
 
 1. A hUj {)]•(. l)urns briolitly. 
 'ii-ec earts were i^'oin!' ah 
 
 2 V' 
 
 ij 
 
 nng nui tliat book. 
 
 >ng tlie road. 
 
 Tl 
 
 >o word " big " is ad.led to « fire " to tell wl 
 8ort of fire it is; t],e word " three » is adde.l 
 
 lat 
 
 (( 
 
 f'MHs" to tell ho 
 
 to 
 
 ^vord<'that 
 is meant. 
 
 J) 
 
 \v many carts there wcr 
 
 :ind th 
 
 is added to " book " to tell which book 
 
 0. ])KKr.\lTI 
 
 with 
 
 or fact 
 
 N-.—An adjective is a word used 
 a noun to denote snme quality, attribute 
 
 ^ 7. They ,nay bo divided into (puilifallnc ad 
 lives, fptantitdtive adiect 
 
 (■(V 
 
 (lete 
 
 r))iu)fiHve adjectives. 
 
 jcctives, and ilemoh,<iirati>i 
 
 e or 
 
 «. (.).ialitative adjectives denote some qualihj 
 
 atti-ibute 
 Color 
 
 or 
 
 Size 
 
 A u-hlt, liorsc. A hhu'h ([ 
 
 A /, 
 
 opr. A rod book. 
 
 <'r;ie Iiorso. A .s/m/// entta-o, A hroj to'.u\ 
 
 Kind M >'<•'' t'.!i<'r. A -/.;i/,Vl 
 
 / A hard rock 
 
 iiinl), Fine woatlior. 
 
 Ill 
 
 0. Quantitative a.ljectives show th( 
 
 m 
 
 g 
 
 K^uiiiber \ li. iJn 
 
 1. Fixed. 
 
 O 
 
 DC. OX. 
 
 u.,j oxon, 
 
 quantity 
 
 onws 
 
 f 
 
 Mass 
 or bulk 
 
 ^-. Uncniam. .So/,,,. pc-riunB. J// {!l,i|,|ron. Afanv 
 ( oluldion. /'Wyirls. A',> men. 
 
ADJFCTIV^KF!. 
 
 29 
 
 ti.n.-s donotvC hy a .onnnon noun. 
 
 This horse ,cno w.„m oiu. pointo.l ut) 
 That hor.-e {thef"yf/>rr oiu. i.oi.uc. 1 at)', 
 
 1L\ yl;^ is n.,a before Avonls booinninc^ uKh 
 ^OM'ol sounas; ., before wonls l,<..innh... with , 
 sonant sounds. "" *'' "' 
 
 «use. J/, art; m/ end ; .mheir; .m urn. 
 
 calM f^^''''''^ ^"'-'^^-^ ^-'" Pi-or>or nouns aro 
 c^.aprope. a<lectlocs. Th.-y are ilk.strated in the 
 toIh)\niig sentences : 
 
 I- The RuHsiau Govornnnuit is a despotism. 
 "' '^^^''^ ^^"^'"'> l'^''M'J^" are f,,nd of music. 
 
 roLi;;;^;^' """"'""^"■"--'" --of 
 
 Kussia. 
 
 Italy. 
 
 America. 
 
 Adject i 
 
 Itiissian. 
 
 Ital 
 
 Ai 
 
 ces. 
 
 lati. 
 
 Mcriean. 
 
 
 
so 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 14. As ]^voim-7wuns are always writton with caj,i- 
 talH, so adjectives derived from them are also writtfii 
 with ea])itals. 
 
 State tlio mistakoB In the following : 
 
 The russimi govern men t, ; The itfdum peo])le. 
 
 15. TJie adjective fornie.l from the ]>ro].er noun 
 Switzerland is Swiss; from the proper noun China 
 IS (JJiinese. 
 
 Wrlto the a.ljoctivos formed from the following nouns: 
 
 Sj,ain, Scotland, Jaj.an, France, Germany, Ire- 
 ^ind Africa, Australia, Turkey, Canada, Paris, 
 ilnglana. ' 
 
 Exercise ii, 
 
 A. 
 
 Select t,]ie adjectives. 
 
 B. 
 
 ^ Write a sentence on each of tlie followinrr sub- 
 jects, introducinrra now,, an adjcctlm, and ^ verb 
 Number the nouns 1 ; the verbs 2 ; and the adjectives 
 
 Model.— Trees : Large trees gi oV in Canada. 
 l.FloAvers. 2.The Rainl,o^^^ 3. Army. 4. Railroad. 
 
 (Joange pupors for florreotjou, 
 
1 wiUi caMi- 
 Iso writtfii 
 
 peo])le. 
 
 »])or noun 
 )un China 
 
 any, Iro- 
 a, Paria, 
 
 31 
 
 na 
 
 tOAIl'AliiHON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 C. 
 
 ^Vnt.p,encc. introducing tlK,.1j^^^^ 
 
 J\ronEr,. — Suit/crlTTul • c ,. • 
 
 1- Africa. 2. I,„lia, a. C..,:,,!,. ,. j„,,,„. 
 
 «.«..«.. pa,,or,, «,„! corpoot „ith retcrcnc, to- 
 
 '' '""'"■ ^'"= -'J™"v- arc ccrcctb. «n.lJ,li',:; . 
 
 
 f (, 
 
 if: 
 
 2. A Inrpe 
 
 IiuiuImoiho 
 niicii iiiiir- 
 lirovi(!(;iice 
 M' Np.iiiisli 
 All hoMicd 
 iikca lot in 
 
 iiig sub- 
 \ .1 verb. 
 TJccdves 
 
 .anada. 
 ail road. 
 
 XiV.-C0xMl-AliIS0N OF ADJKCTIVKS. 
 A <«// Mian. 
 A Id/lcr ni.an. 
 Tlio tallest man. 
 
 1. nc,.o arc tl„,,o n,ljcctivo«_",nll," '^um.r" 
 • ' l^'"!." Vou sec tiKit " tailor " a,,,! " i,||,.„ ' 
 
 " k»n\ of rchuionslH,, to "Hll" V ?'" 
 
 __ .^ ju.t t,rll-|-cr, and " tallest " i» tall+cst. 
 
 - " hi'., wc hear a m&r man spoken of ,vn 
 
 '■;■';;. tat, co.np,.rl,,,, ,,im „.itl,Unc,L.,;r 
 
 'I'i'l.ty. In g,-a„,n,ar, 8„cl, a cI,nnf;o of aillective, 
 a« f roa. .„« to taller ana .,&., i. calW c^^; ■ J:! 
 
 P 
 
 Ir'ii I 
 
'M::* 
 
 82 
 
 LAXOrAilIi LKSSOxVS. 
 
 n DKinxiTioN—Comparison i^ a variation of 
 the form of an adjective to express the quality 
 in different degrees. 
 
 T<(Uc?' is (•;ill(.,] t,li(. companithK i\ri;vvi^. 
 tallest is ca!l('(l the .^upcrlutioc dc-jcc' 
 Tull-~^h, simple form of th. .•uljcctivc-is called 
 
 4. UuLK.-The comparative de-ree is formed 
 by addmg i.:it to the positive. 
 
 ^ ->. UuMo.-The superlative degree is formed 
 uy addmg kst to the positive. 
 
 J^osidne. Oomparathc. Superlative, 
 
 <^^'--n.d. Grander Grande..^ 
 
 iLLL^STKATIO^•s. 
 
 J>lii(.- + (■.•--=„ot W-,/cer, l,at bluer, 
 Kcd + tT.=:i)()t ^•cv/'^T, but rcY^c/Ter. 
 If.Mppy + er.:^.ii„t h<tpp>/cr,, but /^<7vy/cr. 
 
 KuMos Fou Si-KMaxu A.MKr'nvKs.-L VVi.enaL 
 -^jocnv. ends in ., tl. . is droppc^^^^ 
 
 H. AVIUM, an adj. vtive ends in u «in.;l.. consonant 
 jM'occdc'd l»v a sin«de vo^.'-.^l ilw.f >,:„„]^ ^ 
 
 " ^"- ^■" -'5 '"-'i' 'Single consonant IS 
 
 doubleu holorc .. and e,L ]?.d+cr.^roddcr ; bnt 
 swoet+or:=:.,.cviV';. becau.sc tlie t Is preceded by 
 two vowels. ^ 
 
rOMVMllHON OF An.TRrriVEr,. 
 
 ni. wi 
 
 33 
 
 '<'" ;ui :i(lj(.('iivc 011(1 
 
 ^OT.S(v,,nnt,thoyisc],;u.go,Uonx 
 
 s ill 7/ j.rooodod by 
 
 a 
 
 C.v^. ] I 
 
 ""'•^'"^^■M'-y is;../; precede] I 
 
 lore adding e;. or 
 
 ''• ^Vli,,n tli<. addition of 
 
 ^V'Td too lon.r t,, l„. ,,j 
 
 >y a ('onsoiiant. 
 ^r or e.9^ u-onld ma). 
 
 l;''^''"'V(Ms Innned l.y ,.,,1 
 
 />f('asaiit to tlio 
 
 ko a 
 
 liv 
 
 e, ai 
 
 Ml tl 
 
 »^! «uj)erlativ(' l,y j,„tt 
 
 ''"•^- ^//'>/v;lH.l'.,f(! M 
 
 (^•>r, tjic ooiM- 
 
 |'><^ I'OsiLivo; as -^Mwr(/W 
 htaatiful \ 
 
 II' posi- 
 "1.1? ?//o.s^ lioforo 
 ''^iore hmutifal, most 
 
 F. 
 
 1. Doleful. 
 
 <'>I-J,ltiV0uf 
 
 7. Tl 
 
 '1. {- 
 
 ■lore aro some „ld K„,.ii.,) 
 
 -cnerous. 3. Torril^h 
 
 (•oTn])arativL's and 
 
 KljOCtivcs U'hoHO 
 
 111 
 
 i' ordinary way. 
 
 S'lperlativcs are not formed 
 
 111 
 
 vc. 
 
 Positi 
 
 Jiad . 
 ^'ood , 
 Little. 
 I\fai 
 
 CoiDpanitive. 
 
 .^V 
 
 .15, .ft 
 
 orse 
 
 (^r 
 
 iv> 
 
 Much. 
 
 
 ore 
 
 uro 
 
 Siilieilativo. 
 •...Worst. 
 
 •...li.'St. 
 
 Lf^ast. 
 
 Most. 
 
 Moat. 
 
 'Xercise 12. 
 
 i 
 
 ScdoGt tl 
 })arison : 
 
 le 
 
 (idjoct 
 
 t»e. 
 
 '111'^ tell lite (Jer/ree 
 
 of com. 
 
 li!0. 
 
 '•'•••IIKul ()| |,„ 
 
 oxeicisc, 
 
 1. A lji;,'L:('l- |.;isli 
 
 priidont nuiji. 
 
 li 
 
 on. 
 
 t). A li 
 
 K'll. 
 
 7. A 
 
 V( 
 
 ''t- T). Tliosti 
 
 3. Mo.st nxi;cIloiit 
 
 '•liiiiKicejit Italiiitj 
 
 •■>; «'l"A;iiiit dip 
 
 ■<»ii«est ox. G. 'i'l 
 
 f- H A us(!fi,l 
 
 10 lliosj 
 
 invuii- 
 
 «'""i^o. 10. T),.p,..cti.;t«;;j 
 
 J3. 
 
 CL-fgo i,ap.M.. and write letters 0^ ...itici«.u. 
 
 ;'t 
 
 11 
 
'm.:^ 
 
 84 
 
 LAXOUAOH I.KSSDN-S. 
 
 XV. SKNTKNOKS WITJI AIXmcTIVKS. 
 
 1. A noun may l.ave ewe a.ljortivo to .Icscribe it. 
 or It 'iiayl.avLMnany iKljoclivcs. / 
 
 1. J'ure water is tlie best. 
 
 2. i^i^re, t'^irtr Avatoi' is tlio best. 
 
 3. Pure, clear, spar]din<j ^^-ator is the best. 
 
 o' V^^'f' ^^•'^^^''■^'"^^' ^*« ^<-'^^UO-r than tJie Thames. 
 ^. Ihe ht. Lawrence is lonyer an<l ./.Wer tlian 
 llie Thames. 
 
 3. The St. Law]-ence is longer, vnder, and 
 grander than tlie Thames. 
 
 1. I5aeon was tlie brightest of mankind 
 ;-MJaeon was the brightest and '^;/.,.,^ of man- 
 kind. 
 
 3. Baeon ^^'^Hihi, brightest, wisest and meanest 
 ol mankind. 
 
 2._PuNcTi7ATiox.-Ina series of adjectives bo- 
 iongmg to the same noun, a comma is j.laeed after 
 eaeli adjective cxcej,t the hast ; but when two ad- 
 jectives are joined by and, or or nor, or either or 
 neither,iho comma is omitted. 
 
 ILLUSTBATIONS. 
 
 1. " Pure, clear water is tlie best "-one comma 
 to sc])arate the two adjectives. 
 
 2. "The St. Lawrence h longernn^ wider than 
 the lhanie8"-<t«o adjectives linked by "and " 
 iicnce not sej)arated by a comma. 
 
 3. " Pure, clear, spai-kling M'ater is the best '*-^ 
 two commas to separate the three adjectives. 
 
'm..* 
 
 oscribo it, 
 
 I best. 
 </or til an 
 ide)', and 
 
 1. 
 of nian- 
 
 meanest 
 
 ivcs bo- 
 :'t] after 
 tvu) ad- 
 ither or 
 
 comma 
 
 \n 
 
 er th 
 
 " anrl," 
 
 est '*— 
 
 3. TIk! sentence 
 
 "liiK'on was tl;e l,ri.r|,tcst <i-i«,,.. 
 rt„ten,cM,ls : ^ '" "'' """ ""^ f""">vi„g 
 
 '■ Ji-'on w,.,s tl.e l,ng!„e.st of ,n,,„ki„,l. 
 
 <i-].acon,v.-,sthon,enne..tof„,,,nkm,]. 
 ■I- In like nmnner, a numl.,.,- of sei.„-,.n ^ , 
 mentsmay be eon,l.ine,I inio one vi , "" 
 
 ^r .akin, out t,,ea,ljeetivo,,a::U:ial""'""'' 
 
 n.LUSTUATION. 
 
 1. In tl,e nmrning a sailor ean,c on board. ' 
 
 -. iio was a tnt sailor. 
 ii. IfcMvas a jolly sailor. 
 
 4. He was a rud-noscd sailor. 
 Combined: In the inorninrr i f.,f i n 
 
 no.ed sailor came on board. ^ ' J'"^' '"^*- 
 
 Exercise 13. 
 A. 
 
 taking out the rif^tc'^/z;ej part from eaeh «tnf : 
 
 as in the model above. statement, 
 
 1. One day my mothfir irav«^ ir« -,« nr^„ 
 
 J ' 
 
 Li!l 'I 
 
sn 
 
 (.A.\'il-'A(iK I, 
 
 :s SON'S. 
 
 1 . I oticr' Ii.i.l M fi icii'l. 2. SI 
 
 ?0!i<«nMis fri'Mi.l. .1. s 
 II li>viii;i fi ic 
 
 10 WHrtJi U()l)lc'-lic;iit(ul fruMid. n. SI 
 
 \v;iH 
 
 1. J; 
 
 ni.'irlili's. ,",. I! 
 
 nc- W'ph^for lost somo iii;irf. 
 
 Tl, 
 
 '";. v.ci-o roiiii,! iiiail.lc.s -1 ri 
 
 ',v wore sni'ill 
 
 riiaiMr.s. :.. nwy wuo |v,li li..,I n,,,,!,] 
 
 !'•>• \\(!1U wliito 
 
 1X1 
 
 1. A l.dv ran a\v;iy frnm -riion] vostftdin 
 
 iro 
 
 wu^ a, i|iiarii'l,-uiiio 1 
 
 II 
 
 »">•. -4. II 
 
 I' was a cfoti.M 
 
 (• wa.- a lazy i;uv. 
 
 1. 'I'lif 8i>(>al,-(ir liad a 
 'ivafla thill vnico. 4, It 
 n^n'caMc voico. 
 
 voice. 2. It was a s'uil 
 
 was a [.ij 
 
 ';".%' vijico 
 
 It 
 
 I viiii'c. :'.. II; 
 Nva.s a iii<- 
 
 1- 'I'Im' lliiiialuv.'iH cxtciKJi'd 
 
 ftin lofty. X Tlio'Hiir.al 
 »uo\v-caj)pcd. 
 
 •'•''i-oss A.-i, 
 
 '■ " Tlir Hiiinl; 
 
 t.v-.saio iiiujtvstic. 4. The liiuial; 
 
 |ya^ aio 
 
 JJ 
 
 r'l 
 
 laii 
 
 g(i |iniM'i'< fur corriM'tiun. Attriid 
 
 tliatiuii of th" aijjfcti 
 
 I'av h"i'arl'. 
 
 ■" tin: |ii!iu'- 
 
 Pimctn;itc tlie iufj'cdras in \hv UA\ 
 
 1- Tlif sailor had ;i I, 
 
 <'^V1J)<,' (.;iH- 
 
 ir-r. slntii^' \vAY<\ and siid):inir>d hand. 
 
 li- Tlio rrardci. 
 pcoiitod llowern. 
 
 as fdiod witli r; 
 
 I'f cii.-'tlv hoaiitifnl ,s\vo(?t- 
 
 .*!• Haflic lind a short sc;!si!)lo woll- 
 
 Wfll-i.iiii. dial 
 
 I'll I'DIUpOSlll.iII. 
 
 writtmi \voII-sji'l!nd and 
 
 4. Tlio Hoiidor is the lan;i>.st st 
 loss of l)irds of pniv. 
 
 I'on-ost s-A-iftcst and most tin 
 
 Tt. The lofty niajost 
 Atiia froiu cajt to ueyt. 
 
 snow-napi)od Ili-'ialaya,- j'xtcnd 
 
 acroas 
 
 XVI. PKEDTCATIi: ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. The adjectives lliat we Iiave thus far taken 
 •M)tice of have been adjectives that have preceded 
 du- nouns tliey described. Thus— 
 
 1. yjW?f^//>^/ lUnvens bloom. 
 
 -. The blue sky shines above ua. • 
 
''^■:s 
 
 •") SllO \V!l» 
 
 '.verc Sinn II 
 \M!iu wliito 
 
 \\;is .'I (TOSH 
 /.V hoy. 
 
 lliiil.'ll.'iy^iS 
 ii;il;iy;i.s are 
 
 t\u 
 
 p1!M(.'- 
 
 li.iiul. 
 
 fill SWf'Ct- 
 
 )'l'n,1 aril] 
 most tlie- 
 
 r taken 
 receded 
 
 MlicMfATj.: Af.,ri 
 
 Ci IVIJS. 
 
 9 
 
 nl 
 
 Adjectives he I 
 
 ^v;^}^s prcca/e tli 
 
 ^'HL: to MouMs, !,„( tliPy ,|,, ,i,,t 
 
 1. The t] 
 
 V nouns to which Ihey helon 
 
 Jr.T.USTIJAlio.v' 
 
 (r. 
 
 "wers !ire 
 
 O T" 
 
 he sky is /V/zc 
 
 x'tiniiful. 
 
 (t i> 
 
 JJeautifuI 
 
 tives in the 
 
 U'fU'es, and they hel 
 
 and "hiiK 
 
 ii-e just as much ;idje 
 
 ■■^«' sentences as they are iu the /irst 
 
 J'l l)oth oases "heautiful'M 
 " hhie " d<'Sfi;!w,.. u ,1... >• t 
 
 "nuj to exjictly the 
 
 S(!M 
 
 ''^anie nouns 
 
 tl 
 
 i<'scrihes " s|^ 
 
 • 'sci'ihe 
 
 u 
 
 (! 
 
 1 1 wers 
 
 M 
 
 y 
 
 IJut 
 
 ind 
 
 '^"y arc Ml the predic<Ue. 
 
 in the I;ist seiitence 
 
 •3. An ndj.'ctive ofm 
 
 noun it dcscril 
 th 
 
 '^ry.v citJi 
 
 (T 
 
 H's, or else it is in f|- 
 
 verb he. In t!.o iMt 
 serihes is tlie .'^nhjert of tl 
 
 "'■('oinpanics tlie 
 •' I'lcdicate after 
 
 sentence "The flow 
 
 <'r cas(! tl 
 
 K! sentence 
 
 ><■' noun it de- 
 
 T! 
 
 ins, in the 
 
 IS 
 
 (( 
 
 >\vei-s. 
 
 f! 
 
 KS'iutiful 
 
 and it 
 
 f''-« nre h,,nKifnP' the sid,ieet 
 
 is (h 
 
 n 
 
 catc adjcciioe. 
 
 Such 
 
 ierihed hy the adject 
 
 ive 
 
 I an adjiMrtive is caMed 
 
 prcdi- 
 
 ir-LUSTUATIOXf 
 
 1. I 
 
 n suinmor the days are lo 
 
 ?^7. 
 
 H 
 
 oro 
 
 ' loni 
 
 o 
 
 The O 
 
 imits 
 
 W 
 
 JH tlio pro.lioato adjectlvo, and I 
 ■i]>tain was hram^ prudenL and 
 
 ■davM. 
 
 ?0),*.v 
 
 r.Ti 
 
 Iimitintr " 
 
 vn'''« prudent," ami 
 
 Caiita 
 
 in. 
 
 wise, 
 
 are predicate adjectivetj 
 
 4. Predicate adjecti 
 
 srcnic way as adjoctives tl 
 
 ves are punctuated in th( 
 
 lat precede noun? 
 
 E 
 
 xercise i< 
 
 t- ^Iiko ,'1 yontf 
 
 "CO t<>IIiii:r f),,., 
 
 P^^««.n«the,uulitie«by;.a.^-;«;:j;^ 
 
 ;('i.ilitif;.-' of r/, 
 
 ecCa' 
 
 a. 
 
 c ycea/i-ei«. 
 
 ( , 
 
 k 
 
liH 
 
 r.A-Kr,V\r,fr. r,T?S.qoNfi. 
 
 Clmngc pnpor.. and write lottors of criticism. 
 
 XVir. POSSKSSIVK FOIfM OF NOUNS. 
 
 1. Wo nrc now to learn about a clian^^^o in the 
 j-M of noun, wl.icb ,ive. tli.n the powJ^ of 1 
 
 ii. Com] tare — 
 
 'Dm c™.,// 1 ■ , ^^'"^ '"^ coat. 
 
 J he ..mr/// shoes, .with. . ../«<//..' shot-s. 
 ^j,^^.A/n. house .vith. .../.,,,,., h,,^ 
 
 Sninll >-arca(]jc'ctives. 
 line ) 
 
 ,,;!' ^"\VT "'"" "■'^ '*•■•>' "'^""t " J>'l.n'« "and la 
 <lics," and "fat ii'i-V?" 'n„ _, •■■"■ la 
 
 .!,„ l„. ''''"^'-sf ■""■sc words seem to have 
 
 1.0 sa„ e, ,se as "tl,i.s" and "small "and " (i„o ■' 
 
 f,„ nf- ''"= """'^ " Jol" S" " ladies',- 
 .l,er." arc gonerallj called noun, i„ the p^s. 
 acsswe case. ^ 
 
 hr'r^T""""'-''^^' possessive case is that 
 
 thaTsoH'^l ^r '"■°"°""^ ^'^'^h shows 
 that somethmg belongs to the person or thing 
 for which it stands. ^ 
 
 6. 1{ui.El._The possessive singular of a noun 
 case, man s ; /,or«e.- possessive case, /lorsc's. 
 
!? 
 
 full(HVi!lfl(— 
 
 )UNS. 
 
 'f^c in the 
 M- of jul- 
 
 se. 
 
 "and la 
 
 to h;ive 
 
 " fine/' 
 
 1 which 
 
 adies',' 
 le poS' 
 
 is that 
 shows 
 ■thing 
 
 inoun 
 I s('s) 
 ubjoet- 
 sessive 
 
 POSSESSIVE FORSr OP NOUNS. 39 
 
 thnt hn'' V/^'^^' Pos.ensive plural of nouns 
 that have their plural in s (that is rceular 
 plural) is formed by writing merely the apo^- 
 rophe after the s. Thus, ph.nd L^.JZ, 
 ^7^.- possessn-o, ^oi^s^;laM,,, j.osso.sivo, ladU 
 
 then add the apostrophe and s for the plural 
 1 Jius, men : i)ossc'ssivo men's. 
 
 Subject-Form. 
 Lion. 
 Scholar. 
 ViUlcy. 
 City. ' 
 Wife. 
 
 rotuto. 
 
 Fox. 
 
 Calf. 
 
 Dwarf. 
 
 Tooth. 
 
 Brooch. 
 
 Sheep. 
 
 Child. 
 
 Moses. 
 
 Davis. 
 
 Jacobs. 
 
 James. 
 
 ILLUSTltATloXS. 
 Possessive i)in(jular. 
 Lion's 
 Scholai-'s. 
 Valley's. 
 City's. 
 Wife's. 
 Potato's. 
 Fox's. 
 Calf's. 
 Dwarf- 
 Tooth's. 
 Brooch's. 
 Slieep's. 
 Child's. 
 Moses's 
 Davis's. 
 Jacobs's. 
 James's. 
 
 Possessive Plural 
 Lions'. 
 Scholars* 
 
 Valleys'. 
 
 Cities'. 
 
 Waives'. 
 
 l*otatoes'. 
 
 Foxes'. 
 
 Calves'. 
 
 Dwarfs'. 
 
 TeeiJi's. 
 
 Brooches'. 
 SJieep's. 
 Children's. 
 (Xo plural.) 
 (Xo plural.) 
 (No plural.) 
 (^^o plural.) 
 
 Esercisc 15, 
 A. 
 
 Put the folloAving expressions into tho 
 jorm : 
 
 possessive 
 
 So . 
 
::|i 
 
 40 
 
 I'AXOtTAGK LKfiSONR. 
 
 "'s<'>.r:tlsli..,,. loS-hol.;.,!-';:; uieul'lr''''"''- "• '^'"^^'^'^ 
 
 Ji. 
 
 Write tl.e following sinm.iar 
 I'hmd/orm : 
 
 possess! ves in the 
 
 1- Tlio liorse's teotli. 2 
 
 pi.'i.vM 
 
 dress. 
 
 liiJi 
 
 •ss. (i. TJ,esoMi.r\s^.?M '7'n^,T'"r''',^''' "'• A woman's 
 " .>^ imilwihi. "" HMi row's no.st. lU. Tlio {^oiitle- 
 
 c. 
 
 1. AVrite two scUonoe.s on each of t),o following 
 -r.K u.ng t,.o possessive fonn in the : : :f 
 
 L'li ])JiJiai Avitli tiie second : 
 
 Klei>liant-Iving-Sl)ee])-La(ly. 
 
 Cli.unpo i)npors for oornKitioii Wt-H . i i. 
 thoj)oaht-yHi\caoui.B. *-''ih..iii.iu, « i,.xuivip«, bo far jia i-o^rm-^j 
 
 
 .»< 
 
 I XVIII. ^./VERB^. 
 
 TJie big fii-e burns hrhjhily^ 
 Tliat book is exceedimjly dear. 
 Some birds lly ^,o•y .sv/Z/i/^j^. 
 1. Tlie M^ord « brigbtly " modifies the meaning of 
 the verb "burns;" ''exceedino-Iy " ,„odiZ ^I 
 mcanmg of the adjective " dear ; " " very » ntaifies 
 
■ADVERns. 
 
 41 
 
 ''K'ohs. 'i, 
 
 l*ll<'llltS>. 
 
 in tlio 
 
 'legree, cause, cfiVct -■ \ u ' '"^^"". 
 
 'i-it on action or :,u;ib:,;-c:7'"'"'"''^^°'- 
 
 iiML.tl,im[\VlHMv ?]/,«.« 4 
 
 -":;;:;t:;;;,::'::;:r;,!fr:v;:VT''-'-™ 
 
 4- ^\.iv,;,.b„ l,,y stress on <„/>,,■<,■««,, , 
 This iiik- is \,hu:k. ... o. , 
 
 T Mt InL- ;: '"' l^^'^^''^ • ; ." [ ^^^^^^ expressed by 
 
 ''' '"'^ '^ ■'"'^"-''- ^i^'^'J^' S" very." "u>o." "ratl.cr " 
 
 5. Adverbs Of ,%;.,, ,„,^.^,,^ ^ 
 
 force to other Wm-<^6' . ^^ ^'^'^ 
 
 He talk, hastily , , ,, ^ "7 ^^''"'^••"^tly. 
 
 The binUs the 0. V S:; ' ; ^ 
 
 «• iWost adverbs end ill A/ 'n,;, >,• ,. 
 
 JVhat doe« *v.«c^/, u.oan ? ./..7, > ,,,/,,,/,,//„ ,' 
 
 '. He may take almost anv 'uHertlvn , i ,. 
 
 ,; i ' - 
 
 PI i - 
 
 I (^ 
 
42 
 
 LANGUAGB LKS80X8. 
 
 Adj. Gay-f. ly^^adv. gay]y : in a gay mannef. 
 Adj. swoct_^Iv==^adv.8\vectly : inasmet manner. 
 Adj. Nioe-i-ty , .(IV. nicely: in a nice manner. 
 
 8. Some adverbs do not end in /y. They are <-ou. 
 erally sliort words denoting time, place, manner or 
 ^ause, affirmation or negation, repetition, and guan. 
 tity or degree. 
 
 Pupils will wriio on tholr slai-os tLo following list • 
 
 &.^;;;";/':^:;;;;;:;:;;;,z);'^^'""^ ^<^^^ ^^^^'-^^ u^o^e; 
 
 Advcrhs of M AVM,,: : x.eH ; /// .- hoxo ; erei'i/ ; so ; as. 
 Advcrbn of Cau.sk am) Kin.'Kcr • u-tn, ■ th,Z,],-: i 
 
 CH'i-e/oye i-J^iJ-ci. ji/iy , thcrvjoie ; whence ; 
 
 ^^ Ad verbs of g.AXT. rv ou lJr..K,.uc : v'./^c ; ta.r ; m.c/* ; a/- 
 
 0. Adverbs are conij.ared in tlie same manner as 
 adjectives. 
 
 Comparative. 
 Sooner. 
 JMore sweetly. 
 
 J-*o.ntlve. 
 
 Soon. 
 
 Sweetly. 
 
 ^Superlative. 
 Soonest. 
 Most sweetly. 
 
 Exercise i6. 
 A. 
 
 tl.c^'beion^ ^^'"^ ""^'"'*''' '"'^ ^'" *^^^^^"^ ^^'-^^^ 
 
 h. Aluu^H exorci,.o is well written. !). Wo sI.uU iui fill in 
 il.Mj,nv.spaper comes out daily. 11. Few men we al v ys hai>. ?' 
 12. IJiis lesson has not been perfectly prepared. ^^ uapi>y. 
 
annet; 
 5 manner, 
 lanner. 
 
 there area 
 
 i» juljectivo. 
 i I'roin a(J- 
 lu Jidverlj ; 
 1 locclij tlio 
 jective. lit 
 •AiuUy is nn 
 
 are goii- 
 turner or 
 
 id (JHCUl. 
 
 ohen. 
 
 ; whayice ; 
 nay; yea. 
 
 uch ; al- 
 
 iinor as 
 ive. 
 
 ietly. 
 
 I diss 
 
 •V, 3. I 
 1 {* 4 
 
 G. We 
 Iv )ii<i^h 
 III. 10. 
 
 PllUAHKS. 
 
 13. 
 
 13 
 
 Insert tl.c adoerhs that arc omitto,! . 
 
 1- AN ild /lowers f;i(lo o p,„ 
 
 some. 7 will you iome ? 8 Tell nf ^""''n' '' ^^''"^'«- 
 
 mny so . la We shall rest ■-- '"^ ^"''^^' ~ 
 
 y. You 
 
 C. 
 
 ^' ^^iilm'^^.^^'T^':':^ containing adverbs of] 
 
 3. Jlake six sentonw's" co'nV ' " )' '.. juivcri,;' n't 
 
 4. Make six se.itouccs containing adverbs of 
 
 degree _ 
 
 Using tJie verbs 
 cnni,\ ;,o, call, 
 i''"l/>,nni, 11(111/), 
 Jh, ^in{/, cry. 
 
 Using the ,'1,(1- 
 ioctives sot't, 
 n(ml,sweef„6it' 
 icrjina, blue. 
 
 XIX. PIIRASKS. 
 
 1. "l^he ai'moured man. 
 
 2. Our sea-side cotta^-e 
 «. A beautifid tiling.'' 
 
 8ca-side, beautiful," are adjectives. 
 2. We may give the same idea by saying, 
 
 1- Tlie man in ar?nour. 
 
 2. Our cottage l>i/ tJixi sea-side, 
 
 3. A ihm^ of beauti/. 
 
 ^J^- Take these beautiful words of the poet Shel- 
 
 Like a glow 
 
 worm golden 
 
 In a dell ofdcio, 
 Scattering unbeholden 
 Its atrial hue. 
 
 ! H 
 
 : t 
 
saino sense as "ui a (loll (>/•(/„„." ' 
 
 Mlc, "of l,e„„ty," .„,„<„„.„ ..,,,,.,.,,„ 
 "iH'anly" arc «.«„,,,. The wor.l. " in" an,l "of" 
 are^«-9„„«,W 1„ the expression "tl,e man in 
 
 M.ni Jn the o.x|,res«„.n " hy ihe se,,-si4e " the 
 
 1.C e.v|,ress,.,n "a thing of l«,„t,," ,he i.rei^.suion 
 "ot"jon,s "beauty" to "thin..." 
 
 5. ]to,.Nmo^._A preposUion is a word 
 placed before a noun or pronoun, by ,„eanrof 
 wh.ch we show the relation in which things 
 and thcr actions and attributes, stand '^ 
 Other things. 
 
 «• W<. Imve in K„j;|i.si, „,,„„t f,n „f ^^ 
 ..s.t.ons S.xof the most nsed are to, of,\fil 
 
 7. ])KK,xrno.v.-A preposition with its ac 
 companymg noun is called a phrase. 
 
 ILLUS-UATIOXS. 
 
 1. Brevity is the soul of wit. 
 
 ^^. There is no terror in your threats. 
 •1 For I /„ ,,y),v/^ ),j^^^, ^j^^^. j^^^^^^^ 
 
 :'7^rc.?/.r//^ c/rcfes o/ <Ae houndim, sky 
 
 4. Four aiigeLs v^'Hh Jlamin.j swords guarded 
 the gates of Par at Use. 
 
 .,hnsf "r''° "■"'■"' ,"''^ °*'"" •"-' '^''■•"■S"' '«" » 
 
 piu asc. 1 or examjile : 
 
 "" ,"SS 'Zt '/,?„"::•;''? ■" '"" ""'." *™r. 
 
3onvey tho 
 
 y tlio SCI- 
 =i<li'," .'Hid 
 aiifl "ot" 
 <i III. 'Ill in 
 nour" lo 
 !i<l<'," thu 
 tngf." Jm 
 
 "t'l'ositioii 
 
 a word 
 
 ncans of 
 
 things, 
 
 tand to 
 
 CSC prr.>p> 
 its ac 
 
 guarded 
 into a 
 
 ur. 
 i 
 
 Kxcrciiic 17. 
 A. 
 
 4i> 
 
 1. 'r]ll! Sllcci, ;|i,, 
 
 *?:'■'!■ '''■ \W Jjvrs .. 
 
 Id 
 
 
 v; niiis jicuss tlie tiold ^ '"''""" "'^i-'i' tlic timu. (i j 
 
 lil 
 I. 
 
 1. 'I'll" trees ,,f tlic .r;,nl 
 
 <li>\vii til.' v.'illcv 4 T V ''.''"' ('ImipI,. ;{. 'I', . ,, " 
 
 ■">; "11 tiic i„:,d. ii'iiicriiiij f„ii.-iii,j, (i. nicijiiiii iijit 
 
 c. 
 
 ai.-.„,i,',i tl,e iinli,.i.,,l „-„,.,l.s i„t„ ;,/„.,„,, . 
 
 """■'■ "'"'■"'• "• •n,..,.e-, ■:;;;;';;;,• nilirirs,:™ -'""■ " ^ 
 
 f"P|iiy a|.|in,,,n,t, rr.p.'^Mo,,,, t,..,, , 
 
 "■;-''^ "'■'■■''■■''■■■'■-■''"••"-• .i"w./'n«.f„!, ,,,:,'■''■ 
 
 E. 
 
 Make soiitonco:; witl, tl.c following phrases : 
 Jfonia.— Tho hoi-s.. staiuls ,•„ Lis stall. 
 ,i/"i""' ','"'"•■■ "" "if t-ii'i". "( till- »..i„„ I I. ., 
 
 / 1 
 
 i 
 
 'If 
 
 . ! 
 
 ■■t 
 . .5 .J 
 
 I, • ; 
 
46 
 
 tim (ill', thro,i,,f, (1,,, / I I ; 
 
 'ice 
 
 J^\ 
 
 I'J 
 
 ii-.'i.sos 111 1 1. •! lies; " '''^" 
 
 1. A m;.no/-tv>»n,,/,,i„cs„otfr,-,r.I..;,tl, 
 ;|. Wo s;nIo.l,,ntIu. rivor 1,3.//,,. /,//,, ,„,,,,^ ,,,,„,,, 
 ^^. ^, n,o antlom, ,n..narch .,>,.,„ in k.ste funu Uis cuucl. of 
 4. '-'•"■•.inf,M-st]„M>yco/^/,, ,„,-,„,. 
 
 fi. ^^«^'ttI.r/.omvf,,,vr,-«/,>MTtMn,,..l|,.,.iu,,.U 
 
 «. People a< .,.-, .>.e „,, bettor thun Mu-.v ever du. before. 
 
 • XX. ADJECTIVE AND ADVmniAL 
 
 PHKASKS. 
 
 1. Tl.oro arc two kiiuls of j.Iirases; 
 I. A(lj(H'tivc j)]ira.scs. 
 II. A.lvoibinl })hrnsos. 
 
 2. A phrase is an adjoctive i)I,rasc wlio„ it fiI-,.« 
 ;^Haco of a„ adjective; that is, when i;n^^^^ 
 
 '^J-USTRATION'S. 
 
 1- Tlie man vi armour. 
 2. A thing 0/ ^('aw^y. 
 
"' «'"ni, since 
 
 ■'it-' Wtuiiu 
 
 '^' of ijj 
 
 ia cutich of 
 
 bo/ore. 
 
 UAL 
 
 't takes 
 i raits • 
 
 I I)I»ra»e 
 fiiidiir" 
 'f l>o;ui- 
 ictie are 
 
 1 -^''ii I'lii'cs 
 
 ^ i).:.i, <,, :,,„„l r/iunirYrr * ^"'''''/ )"''"">- 
 
 (i\I)l<l(.') uficnd. I l(<lt,tl,U. 
 
 (i^'iJil) of (iitxitlj/. '. ." ." .' .'.■,■■■_■ , """'"'• 
 
 ILLUSTUATIO.VS. 
 
 1- A great man lives here. 
 
 ti-iM'l;tco." '""' "''"'••'.> -"''.-til Ml" the y.Aras,'" in 
 
 -'. ^ g'-f"-it man lives ,V.M/.s-;>/,,c.. 
 
 3. 'i'l't. tnnyaavancodm;,/,//^. 
 it iH an udVerUal pl^a^e ^ '""^' '""^^ " '^'' v.rL " udv^S/' 
 
 Exercise ib. 
 A, 
 
 ^ Select tho;>/,m...9, ana toll whether thev are <../ 
 jeci'ive or advcrl^ial. ^' ^"t} are a^A 
 
 ti.o-S;r'::;;;:,js^r.r^^;:,^"^ 2. r,. ..0, or 
 
 B. 
 
 Change the following i)hrasefi inin n.j.-. .- 
 
 I' ■■*< ■ 
 
48 
 
 
 ; f . 
 
 ^VXr. J.KSSON^ IN 
 
 ^lAKma SK\TK.\c 
 
 \ViTi! J'illiASl 
 
 i*:s 
 
 1- TJiol'rof. 
 
 lissor 
 
 Ilor 
 
 ■e wo Iiuvf Olio j.l 
 
 fi/ tho. U,um)\Hit 
 
 -^ T)io Pj-of 
 
 "•i«". "oltlio I 
 
 // .u:avo pi-izos. 
 
 for scholar tihi]. 
 
 (.'ssur r>/ ^/^e (fni 
 
 "ivoisity. 
 
 'yc;-.y/^/ g.i^.(3 ^^,.j^^, 
 
 JI 
 
 i/i 
 
 "'■'' "'^^ '^^^'l -^ ««'"on.l ,,]ir;isG, '« for 
 '^' On CoHvocatio)i^,l 
 
 soliol.'irsliip. 
 
 loversiti/ ir.'ivo i.»-!v,.. /• " / , 
 
 ';^y, ^A^ Pn>/\,,,,or of 
 
 thA 
 
 "oro wo udtl ;i tJiinl 
 
 >'S/iin 
 
 4. It 
 
 J)lim.so, "on c 
 
 G.ach cojitaiiiii' 
 
 i« voiy easy to take 
 
 »"V()c;itioil-(l;i^-, 
 
 IJ? 
 
 fi ])lira 
 
 <i niiiiihcr of St 
 
 l*^ ^"'gle sonlenco, just 
 
 111 I] 
 tivo8 
 
 ic case of a iiunibor of 
 
 ^o,nn,] coialjiuotlK.ni all 
 as Wf (11,1 i„ a f, 
 
 i'<*'nonts. 
 
 IMto 
 
 state 
 
 '■"H'l- Ic!SS()U 
 
 '''^'"^•^ H-itli a(|j,..c. 
 
 !• Colinnb 
 
 iij.ustj:atiox 
 
 2. JIc 
 
 "s rotiirmHl fruiii liis 
 
 Iiul 
 
 ics. 
 
 I't'tunieil from hi 
 
 voyage. 
 
 « voyage to tjje West 
 
 TI 
 
 '^- lie returned in 1403. 
 'oso may bo comlH-|K.,I tl 
 
 1- Columbus 
 
 A\^ost Indies in 14.0a 
 
 I'elunied from Ii 
 
 IS V 
 
 •^; OYs 
 
 '^y^^^^ to the 
 
 t,! vv"f S""^- -'--a frcn 
 
 to the West Indie 
 
 s; or, 
 
 his 
 
 ''«yngo 
 
'J- Tlic n„|y |.|,Ie that can U- ,'W,.„ ;„ ,i ■ 
 '-.co .o„„,l ,„o.t ngr Jwe ,o the ea "'^ '""■ 
 
 Exercise ig. 
 
 ^^'-'I>. ^'-I'nno.paIst;,u.,ncnt is .ivoa first: 
 
 3. rrinthtf, 7ras U)vr„tr,l if „. 
 
 byGiitcnbci- '*""-itciiUi century, it was invented 
 
 niianpro p.incrH for oorrof Mnn o •, 
 
 'ill 
 
 -,• I 
 
60 
 
 J'ANUUAUJK LE.S.SON.S. 
 
 -XXH. NOU.NS J.V Al'iUSlTJo.v. 
 
 -• WlnitcnVctl.llVl. lIlCMViinl.;"//. // , 
 
 »> iiiMin IS iiic'.'int. 
 A noun tluis used is (••illrwi ., „ 
 
 «J. UKFINITION' A no,,« , 
 
 other word is called -^ '° "P'"*" ^"■ 
 
 °'^'"^ ""ed a noun ,n apposition. 
 
 n.ruSTRATION. 
 
 ^ -i tonuiia or l»y coininas 
 
 1. IToward was loved by all. 
 
 2. Jlou-ard was ^philanthropist. 
 
 3. Ho was a distinguished philanUu-uiust 
 
61 
 
 •"< 11 ii.sc oi 
 
 l>tO(li(;ito 18 
 
 ain an- 
 ion. 
 
 ny itself 
 'f adjec- 
 
 <^t-7-, was 
 
 or ex- 
 
 iibined 
 
 VKK'im WITH OnjETS. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 r.in:;.:;;i:t:^t:^,;7- -^ 
 
 it c.vj.hiin.s. '"' ^''^ """» "liioh 
 
 »•'» ii /■/„/.,«,„<,;' "'■"■'• n»vul >va, tlie ,0,, Of Ja»„. f;„||„i,, 
 
 s,l,l\^!-!;r "■« ^""■>-- "^■'"■"'oa n,,,.„„. „.„„ „,„ „„ 
 
 H 
 
 Iillan- 
 
 Cum- 
 
 XXIir. VKIiUs IVITII OIUEC'TS. 
 
 2. Wc have til lis fai 
 
 noun— the kind Unuu] 
 
 connidcrod only one khul of 
 
 IS such .sfnton 
 
 JJirds ^y. 
 
 eos as 
 
 ''« .f'/ri''??^ 
 
ro 
 
 LA Xf} a A OR r.ESSONS. 
 
 l'I-t<' Ntaten „t; so .Incs f 1... ,,.,1, u .^,i^„ „ '/ ""' 
 ii. IJiit tako tlio foII..u'Inf^-vfilM; 
 
 J.'imcs \V:vU inurntcil . 
 
 Tlioso arc not .n„.,.lct<, slMtr.ncnis tliov dn n . . , 
 -onso. Wo...,c, Discovoro,] «;A.,, liu I J' J^t' ''" 
 
 Boiu. nhjcvt ti.it Watt inventca ^«'''""l"..s d.scovcml, 
 
 ?i. vv 
 
 oinuy make complt'td Stat 
 
 Columbus d 
 
 onit'iits lu tins w 
 
 iscovcred America. 
 
 ay; 
 
 James Watt invented tli(. .s^cv/;,,. 
 
 "iif/hie. 
 
 Wliat 
 
 «.'U>< " di.-cnvcrod 
 
 vciitod •• w.xs tlu; ".^tcaiu 
 
 4. Verbs that mal 
 
 WHS 
 Clli-iiiO.' 
 
 "'f"ii'';i " \VJ,;it 
 
 w.is " in- 
 
 tl 
 
 ko oomj.lrto statements I 
 
 H'lMselves are called mmplUe verl 
 
 5. Verbs that do „ot make comj.loto statemo„t, 
 
 i)ytl 
 
 lemselvos, but i 
 
 tl 
 
 , nut require some word to compl 
 
 10 sense, ai-e called incomplete verb 
 
 etc 
 
 <». 'IMiese are tJie t\v 
 
 o <' 
 
 verbs 
 
 '•<';>t classes into M-liidi all 
 
 iredivided--c'o/;.;>/,.^6 and incomplete 
 Almost all the incomplete verl 
 
 verbs. 
 
 '>>■ nouns, called their object ; as, 'J'j 
 ^•'7c; Men hate tl 
 
 101 r enemies. 
 
 are completed 
 lomas bouidit a 
 
 Verbs lluutnkc ol,j«.t..„-c c-lIIcI (r,.,„sitive verbs. 
 
 (uod, lud 
 
 ivcs III ;i soiicH, 'J'l 
 
 im;is. in M.o 
 
 fti'i.^, Hud iiistnu'ti 
 
 Ml 
 
 "IS : All chii.i 
 
 ■■^■■iiiio ni.uMKir 
 
 '••■II require clutiiins^, 
 
 19 
 
 V __^.^. 
 
VKiats w'lru oruKcrs. 
 
 ' a cnm- 
 
 »1.'ll(0 fill) 
 
 Wo ;irrt 
 scovcrfiil, 
 
 IS Wfiy : 
 
 .It "Jn- 
 Is I, J 
 
 in outs 
 »l)l«'te 
 
 Lih all 
 
 t1).s. 
 
 Ictod 
 .'lit .1 
 
 Prbs. 
 
 ,I><'ts, 
 Kir jia 
 
 53 
 
 '*^. TIlO Vf'll) /»<' i.s (.-(.iw.r.iJI., 
 •'• J)() tllO U'ordc «i /■' 1 1 • 11 
 
 Won,Myoom].K.totl.o.sen.sointl.i.svv.-v. 
 ^'•'Id is yellow. 
 
 ^»oid is :i mcY^//. 
 ^Vt'IIingtoii \vns20'f«leni. 
 Wellington was a f/e7u>rnl 
 
 ~i.i.i.u,, I,, „ — , .,„,i„ „ "'" 
 
 s?</>/Vc^. -^ ' ''""'"^ fonmufj the 
 
 
 rcise 21. 
 A. 
 
 N-anio 11,0 vcrU, nn.l toll M'l.iol 
 
 »vliio| 
 
 I ai-o in 
 
 ^^omj<Jct.e' 
 
 I aro compjpte. and 
 
 /5 
 
 II 
 
64 
 
 LANGUAGK LRSSOXS. 
 
 2 To f l??:"'•^'^^'^ ^'^'' fe^rows in Brazil. 
 
 ^. 1 iie twic.hor lustnicts Itia pupils 
 
 ^. Ciesar luvaded lirifiin. ^ ^ 
 
 4. i 'e niooM moves round tho earth. 
 
 r>. J.IV ,i'.s ai(! I.'ii'-,, .streams of fresl vitnr 
 
 t>. Milton wroto " I'aradiso Lost/' " 
 
 B. 
 
 Fill out the blanks; first hy a ;>..,//e«^. ,^.,,^ 
 in hy.pr^^Ucatc aOJecHve. wl.on done, 2 
 tlie two III one sontenco. 
 
 KxAAii'i-,K. — Iron is t,^„ • 
 
 '•native.] Iron is hant fPrcdicato iZ^i"^^' .trrodioate nom- 
 metal. [Sentences uuited.y -"Ijectue.] Iron Is a hard 
 
 7- Diamonds are -1 % tj^:^Z7~- ^- '^'i'^ '"..on is — . 
 ^ — . 10. Queen V ctoi-ia' r^li"'' ^'"'^ — ' '-^^ '^''''« eJ.urch 
 
 XXIV. REVIEW OF NOUNS. 
 
 I. A noun maybe used as the .^./^Vc^ ^y « ^,,^ . 
 as, 6W«;/.Z..,, discovered America. 
 
 II. It may bo used as tho ^>.../.-.,,,, nominal io e ; 
 as, Iho discoverer of America was Volumlus. 
 
 III. It may bo used as the oI>jcct of a verb - -m 
 Wo should honour Columbus. ^ « ^^^ ^ «'^«' 
 
 r Jc^' t Vj ^T'/" ^^^^'^^^''"^ "«^ [possessive 
 case], as, ^-^-/^^^..'. discovery was a g^ oat event. 
 V. It may have an -planatory use- as Th^t 
 great man, 6^./-.;^^, discovered America 
 
 ;>/LV' r a'' '"' '"'.' ' p"^^^^^^^^» ^^/-- « 
 
iiKViiiw oir Nouxvs. 
 
 65 
 
 OHO, iniitG 
 
 dicate nnm- 
 
 as . 4. 
 
 looii is 
 
 Tliirf church 
 
 a verb ; 
 
 matlve ; 
 >us. 
 
 ■i'b ; as> 
 
 sscssive 
 fc evont. 
 
 h TJiat 
 
 form a 
 rod by 
 
 lives T» fl,„ ,1- °f;"Ka«i.TO],cuto noiniiia- 
 
 1. T],e sea [subject] sMrrounds tl,c -lobe. 
 
 2. lloiiior loved the fax [objfet] 
 
 i. Shri... snil on llic ,<,a [pl,r;ise]. 
 
 -• VBca». an n.Ijcctivo, M,c n,n,„ ,„„Icm-ucs tho 
 101 n. t.illod tlio iicssessivc case. 
 The .w«',, ,l,,,,tli is mmy miles 
 
 3- A noun nsud as tlio siil.ie,.t nf » 1 
 Pmlieate no„,i„ativc is 'ilt hn ,7 ''^ " 
 
 «-ca.so;„secl as an 1 ie t v^ it • , ""'r''''* 
 
 o. U,e ».. „/a no J • l,^,^t;-;:f;'- 
 
 XT . Sinrjular. 
 
 ■Noiniiintlve jri,.] 
 
 Possessive ,,i ,.,■.' 
 
 Objective ::::;;;::-S' ' 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Kirls. 
 
 *,'iilH'. 
 
 • --girJa. 
 
 Exercise 22, 
 
 A. 
 
 Tell the oasc of each ?i(?w;i ; 
 
 ! , 
 
il 
 
 66 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 P;i|>(!r. 
 
 5. 
 
 0. Tiger, 
 
 B. 
 
 Wnto five sentences on e.ch of t),e following 
 
 a,^cts. „ the first, use the .oun in its ^^^ 
 
 |>nnmtl,e second, In its a^O'^cUne innu ; u/thl 
 
 t 'nI,nMtso^ecMV,nn; in the fourth, in ,^ 
 
 I\Ioi.i;i..— Tho f)cr:in. 
 2. Vi;c'S;;S'^?,:;;::4-;:^;-;;y of ;v;,tor s„rroun.]in. tin- „o,,e. 
 
 ioufer (he orcan. "^^- ''• ^''« ^^t'-'intic ciil.lo iuun 
 
 f ii't' Irees. • 4. j..i^,^.,._ 
 
 Cluingc paper., and wrlto l.t„,r.s of criticism. 
 
 XXV. PliONOUXS. 
 c.m,o back .viti.ou" /,«..' "'"' '"' '"""'"' »'"1 /'" 
 1- In tliis sentiMioo ,vc make „sc of throe wo 
 
 to t^f^'I ,','"' ""* ''"'"r "'""'■^' "••■'^''""''' '- f-'O'l 
 
 .-.no C ,arfc. ca.no Lack witl,o„t CV.He.'. ,„ot|,„. 
 inLid o?'a '„"o;-.^ f"-"""- - - word usrd 
 1. IV..™m,„s a,.. ,livi,l„| i,„„ ,«„cfe,>, .W. 
 
 l'n,,o,,al ..bdivisio,,. oi ™l.ta,aive ,,ro„„'.n: 
 
 nt V ;■;'■'•• '"•^•'■'""-■•"•l-Ovl,io.,. 
 tlint. l\ . r„la;-offne„e : ,vl,o. V. /i-fc/;,,/'. .• one 
 
 of luP,rsU...,.so„: /, ,™. U. Tho.c of the Sec 
 oud I'ersoii : (/(„„, y„„. 
 
rnoNoirNs. 
 
 67 
 
 follouing 
 
 1 it.s suhjtrt 
 1'"' ; in tlio 
 ') in its tfic- 
 
 •'"^l-'i, iJi it.s 
 
 I oiit. ;{. 'J'lie 
 
 xhI.V of \\;it,.|', 
 c t';il)lo ruuM 
 
 Tiger. 
 
 »-i', and he 
 
 ^c forced 
 ''>■ niotlier, 
 mother, 
 rd usrd 
 
 '.so, .s-y^,^. 
 
 'iA'. TJie 
 >ronouns 
 
 nonMrn- 
 
 >, M'hie]i, 
 
 't-' .' one. 
 
 . Those 
 
 the Seo 
 
 Tlio tondior win .iintTho .i,„i .i 
 «e.Uom.os. u.ulerjiai,,. tl.oVronoMMH f ""' " ''''' '''"" "'« foUowing 
 
 1- Wiliijiin .Slid to Cliarlos " / .i,,, 
 "•c- cx,.o..tod /. to i>o. ;f ; ,„;\, '"^. ;'"!""''"" ^^-^'^ '-'^'-or than 
 
 is '"// fori,,,,., si X r 6 r; "" ' f ^ "^^'•"^- '- ^^^ "-- 
 ;^ot..diot,.od;ath;:;iu::::;^'77'>^^-^-it. r 
 
 ^o\\. u. that ,.. are i.nmortal. <? ' k. , '.; ?'"* "''"' "^■^"■"tor 
 1^- 7V,., say that tkcir hope, do.oi!;;'^.^"' '"'' ""'«^" ^ --'• 
 
 5 In those ten sentences we have u-rittcn the per- 
 ' onal p..onouns n,ost used together with the demon 
 sti.itive pronouns of tiie tJiird person. 
 
 tive i>ronouns of the (Mra person. 
 
 «. The /r.< person denotes the spca/cer. 
 " he second " « « 
 
 The^/,M « « ^/^^^^^'^ '^i'^^^-^^ ^^. 
 
 />er5o;i spo/cen of. 
 
 10. Pronouns as well as nouns can be used in tl.« 
 following iiositions ; tliat is- ^^'^ 
 
 r. They may Lo the subjects of verln • as TI^. Tn 
 
 :|! 
 
 .■»lw 
 
u 
 
 u, t 
 
 68 
 
 Lax g u a u k i. i:.ss( )\s. 
 
 11. J»ut there Is tills <lilT(.T<'iic(. I 
 
 lIKi 
 
 H'tWci.-ii IKMIIIM 
 
 I-n.nnui.s, M,,.,(, wlnh- uouuh uscl ns n/^Jrcfs ;„..! 
 
 ill j'/ir(f,-!(js Jiiivc (I 
 
 10 same /or//i, ;is iioun; 
 
 .sfihjecls, tlic j.ers(Mi:iI ])roiiotiiis li 
 
 use< 
 
 a^t 
 
 tinctJWnis for eacl 
 
 :ive generally du 
 
 \ US' 
 
 I'ICUSONAL I'lJONot'x.s, ni;sT 
 
 Subject f.inn or Noiniii;it,ivo C 
 
 A<l.)(J(aiV(i |.,|';; „!• J'osscssivr. i 
 
 I'iatso.v, 
 
 iiiuiiUu 
 
 riso. 
 
 Ubjcftjiiul I'lirasu i 
 
 I. 
 
 orm, orUiiji'ctivcC'asc. i^J 
 
 I'l'inil. 
 y or ftliiic. Our. 
 
 I'KilSONAI. I'KONoe.v;. 
 
 SKCOXi) i';i 
 
 sn.v. 
 
 Siilijorf foriM.or N'oiii!;.,ifivr' r 
 A-ljciivo form, or l»os, 
 Object ami J'lirase fu 
 Ca 
 
 :tso. 
 
 t<0 
 
 nil, or Oi.;f.'cti\c' 
 
 Snii/iiiiir. 
 Iloil. 
 
 i.v or Tliiiic. \ 
 
 J'hn-al 
 
 <.nir. 
 
 ace. 
 
 You. 
 
 WKMOXSTKATIVK I'J{O.Vou\S O 
 
 V TiriC Tin It I) PKKSON. 
 
 Sul))oct form. 
 
 Illative Ca.vo, 
 
 or NV)iii- 
 
 Adjcctivo {, 
 
 orm, or 
 
 01 
 
 ....U( 
 
 .Ili.s. 
 
 Sin;n(/<n: PluraJ fnr nil fjcndt 
 
 rs. 
 
 vn,inine. A'ciKvr. 
 
 ho 
 
 I'osscssive Case. 
 )j('ctaii'l I'll rase 
 
 form, c. Ul)ject!vo Case Ilim. 
 
 12. Tl 
 
 Ilor. 
 Her. 
 
 It. 
 Its. 
 It. 
 
 Tiiey 
 
 Tlicir. 
 
 Tlieiii. 
 
 10 van on 
 
 called it 
 
 s cases. 
 
 f^ for)7i^ taken hy a j 
 
 'ronoun ire 
 
 Tliat form in wlijel 
 
 wlicn it istJie subject of 
 
 I .'I noun or jironoiui is used 
 
 a verb is called tlie no}fi 
 
 m- 
 
 aiioun or pronoun M-liieh pIioavs 
 
 (it ice case. 
 
 That form of 
 tliat soniethnig belongs to the person or thin- for 
 which It stands is called t]^^ possessive case. 
 That form in which a noun or pronoun is used 
 len It stands for the object of the action spoken 
 in some verb, or when it comes after a prcposi- 
 called the object ice c«,«e. 
 
 of i 
 tiuii 
 
 5 
 
'f'Jtels :iihI 
 
 •^ USt'il ;i,>j 
 
 L' rally dis- 
 
 \V(!. 
 
 line. Our, 
 La. 
 
 J'hn-al 
 Ynii f)i' ye_ 
 Villi I'. 
 
 You. 
 
 usox. 
 
 W f/cndt.ra. 
 
 They 
 Their. 
 Tliein, 
 Dim ire 
 
 i.s us'jtl 
 noviin- 
 
 t 
 
 sIlOAVS 
 
 ing for 
 
 is used 
 spoken 
 »rc])osi- 
 
 5 
 
 rnoxouN-.s. «« 
 
 The,,romn,nn,yl,as..u>othcrf„nn 
 4< j^ our " i4 .mine. 
 
 .. ' yoiir " u "iir.v. 
 
 ^^ tlioir " it \<iMr,v. 
 
 lii;l' " 4t 'Iicir.1,. 
 
 f^^'/fiion.llias arrived .. ^,, , 
 
 /^/'/' lioiise is J;i|.M(,. . , , '"t 'i;it: is Diinr. 
 
 ,/'""' house is i;u'.re / '"•'^ Jioum; is (Mtrs 
 
 Mrvr cats arc turu.. , .' ''^ ^''""••^. 
 
 ■'/</.>• IS lier doll ■/_'/_ ,,.' .'•■" •''.'■'its are //i,./;.j, 
 
 ' niiutii by ayouno-j.iipil; 
 I no hnii is nn aniin-il 'l'l,.^ t- 
 '' 1-w^^rlal aainiaJ. "• ^^'' '"^" '^ ^ l^^^o ama.al. TJ.e Jion i« 
 
 % using the ]>ronou„ A^, insteid of .1 
 
 -;;;''■•'«-. we .,ouKM,;,,,.rii, ':;:;::' 
 
 il'0Jioui:,a„auiina!. He is lar-o ii ^"^^''U's . 
 
 (),. ^it-J^Ui^o. Ilojsi,uuerr„l, 
 
 •'""ollu„i.ananiu.ai. Ho ishu^c and .ovterfuL 
 E.xcrcisc 23. 
 
 1. Wfi havfi inc«^ rcf^pj 
 
 th 
 
 <'omo t.) livf. xvVti 
 
 cii" ■ 
 
 ifs ficcco si 
 
 Wh 
 
 .od 
 
 nt yofi 
 
 i"'^' of yours 3 il lotto,'.'', '"•'•'''^''*''' 2. Toll hin, wh,.. , 
 '"« ^> live M-ith iH n V '"^ ""^ loachod yoi, 4 ,' l. 
 
 'l;!-!!. '-V0 .':,.;s.t the^T!'; :;::'r,';;:^ "^^j '-. .'-•«'• !J^^l 
 
 7. i lie sheep has h.-Kl 
 
 lorn 
 
 en 
 
 «, 
 
 'tU' y'''Ml'!!lft}' 
 
 \vill they i,ay tl 
 
 iir rrich.l 
 
 I 1110 
 
 i.as 
 in 
 
 uill 
 
 r'\ you on his roti 
 
 "'"■ pronii.^; (( visit'.' " ]() 1 
 
 irn. 
 
 li* 
 
 "''ivo not learned 
 
60 
 
 LANGUAGE LERSOXS. 
 
 B. 
 
 See if you can improve tliese sentences I y usin« 
 pronouas in jOacc of nouns. Make any otfi. , \Z 
 provements you can ; l.ut do not d.ange tl.o sei.so. 
 
 b.a.t Of i.„rd.„. Th. .., , „al, ,' 'I;,':.,!;.-;,:,',, Ji';;; ■■:';;'.,;:.;; 
 
 2. Holland is llOlow til. M'Vfl .-+' flio -no ^1 ^^ 1 • •< , 
 
 3. Tho Israelites wort for a ion-' tinip ^lavos. in F.Tr,.t ti.„ 
 wanderings of the I^rudices tlauu^h the dSui; llS^ kn^;'^ 
 
 ..»ii„H lo cue ii/aid knid. Ihe ^;roe<.dilo is iunpliiblous. 
 
 XXVI. KELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. Tliis is the man who called on you, 
 
 2. I have lost the book inhich I bought. 
 
 3. Tlie house that you sa\v is sold. 
 
 4. Tell mo whnt you did. 
 
 1. In the first sentence, the pronoun «wlio" 
 slnnds for the .vord " man," and connects the sec 
 oud statement, " called on you," with « this is the 
 man." 
 
 2. In the second sentence, t!: ^ pronoun "which " 
 stands for "book," and coi . -cts the two state 
 ments "I bought" and «I have lost the book." 
 
 3. In the third sentence, the pronoun "that" 
 connects the statements " the house is sold " {*n(^ 
 
 I 
 
 (( 
 
 you saw 
 
 » 
 
RELATIVE niOXOUNS. 
 
 61 
 
 ly using 
 til' 1 ini- 
 
 lie stLso, 
 
 I'iimcl ijs ;\ 
 ^>ni vjiter. 
 
 > dofpudod 
 ory ii'ilii.s- 
 
 vi)t. Tlie 
 
 -Oflile be- 
 
 • li;i(l not 
 
 L. 
 
 • wlio " 
 
 lie sec- 
 i is tlie 
 
 •hicli " 
 
 stato- 
 
 5ook." 
 
 tliat " 
 
 4. In i ho fourth scntonno, tho pronoun « what " 
 means the same as "the tliini^ uhich," and con- 
 nects the two statements "tell me" ami «voii 
 did." '^ 
 
 5. DsFiviTiox-A relative pronoun is a word 
 which refers to some noun or pronoun which 
 has been already used to mark the person or 
 thmg spoken about. 
 
 0. the relative pronouns are icho, which, that and 
 
 I 
 
 7. TliG noun or pronoun to wIhcI, a relative r.ro. 
 noun refers a called its antecedent. 
 
 rofi, "'''!f 'I •;«:'l°"ly of persons; as, tl,e ««« «.I,o 
 roads Whu^h „ „,„, „f ^,,i^g^_ ^^. ^j ^^^^ 
 
 .-.n.mals; as, tho table wln'oh foil; t|,o ,fo^ „.,,,,,, 
 barks. J/mt ,s often used for either who oL/nch ■ 
 
 mat iell [used for tr/^ic/ij. 
 
 9. There is only one of these pronouns that has a 
 oparate form for the nominative, possessive, aL 
 objectivo cases. ' 
 
 ^om,Haiwe.(Snhjcct form) ^y, 
 
 J^^sessive. . (Adjective form) ./.;:; w J'"' ^ 
 
 Objective. . . (Objective and phrase form) ." .' .' ^yuZ: 
 
 mo, whose, whom, ivhich, and tvhai w'.cii u^m f« n i 
 tion«, arc called /.^c.ro^«^v;;>;.ono».s! '° "'^' ^"'' 
 
 TJ^osaidso? irAo,, book is this? 
 
 rfAomdulyousee? IKA.eA of you said so ? 
 
 IVhat do you say ? 
 
 ^U8 ? '^ ^""' -' Fi"fc Of interrogaticn, markeif 
 
 ill 
 
 ^f|f 
 
 L' ! 
 
 r„ 
 
62 
 
 LANOITAGE LERSOKS. 
 
 4iul o!^'"'" "'- rrono,n,s, tolling v^.holl,or Ihcy arc relative or I„te^ 
 
 1. Wlio lias 1)0011 in (ho rn.nn 9 o Ti „ 
 
 \"sto.d;ivl,;us 1,0,,, ii Ml o m ,,? -^ i ^'T man who w.ns lioro 
 lio i.rosoiit? 5 J )'..,. .,;'%""; ^- " "I'll <>l tliclioys will 
 
 10. The cl.ief use of rolmivc j.rononns is to con- 
 ncct .stat,mumts, so ns to mak« o„o «t„lc.nu.i.t out of 
 wliat would otlicru i.so l,c two .slahiuenls. 
 
 i 
 
 ILLUSTKATIOXS. 
 
 1. Wc s.iw n 111.111 10/10 killo.l a (leer. 
 The two KtatomeiUs in this sontonco are, 
 
 1. AVe saw a man. 
 
 2. TJiis man killed a deer. 
 
 2. The teaclier i/^/wm we loved is dead. 
 TJie two statements are, 
 
 1- The teaclier is dea(2. 
 2. We loved him. 
 
 Toll the two statements in this 8oiit«n»a: 
 
 High on a throne of royal state, which far 
 Outshone the wealth of Ormns or of Ind, 
 *^atan exalted sat. 
 
 11. It is a very pleasant exercise to take two or 
 more statements and combine them into one sen- 
 lonee by using a relative pronoun to connect Iho 
 etdtements. Thus: 
 
„ Separate ( ,,A,mh? ^'"717^"' "'' J-ivi'i^sfnu., i,uvc ta,i..|,t 
 Statements 1 • ' 7;. , ''^' "•^•■'•'"'' '" -^ f '^••■t. ^ 
 
 Combined. J of T;;:;j|.;::;:::;'';';:;;;V;'-''->^f-H-, "•^^ -.s o„„ 
 
 Exercise 24, 
 
 Combine (';ir1i r^P flwi e 11 
 
 ...Nint ^"I'"H'ini^ groups „f stativ 
 
 Lilts llllo niu. L:n!if/^>...... • -I 
 
 lac 
 
 into otu! .sentence in tJ 
 
 1. Wo;L,'f;tsilK- fror 
 'I'liis cutorjiil 
 
 le manner .sJiuwu 
 
 '1 ••• '^.•itfrpill.'ir, 
 
 Tlifi doctor s;i\v tl 
 
 ar iscalk'd ihe silk-w 
 
 (»rin. 
 
 Il( 
 
 \v.is (lyiu- 
 
 !(-' piiticiit. 
 
 ;«. ,y;>l"i-l;idsoftnn.'Ut,icli tl 
 
 '•^ '"i.V they ii,iit;it(! 
 
 Iiomsolvf's to .s( 
 
 4. I tl 
 
 111 t-vorythiii'T. 
 
 IIIIO oI( 
 
 lor boy. 
 
 This 
 
 "H'-o prosniitodlii,,, u-itl, a kin.'l 
 
 5. Tl 
 
 <'waliO(li,l tluio(! rof' 
 
 list'. 
 
 y crown. 
 
 le 011,1,'iiio killorl til 
 
 Howiis tlio onl 
 
 "■^ H'n|'K-ii,;ii 
 
 6. Tlio ofJlcors i)nrsiiO(I tl 
 
 ysiiplMHiofaiiirgefaniily. 
 
 le lion. 
 
 It li.-ulilostroyed tlic cuttio 
 7. i\FiIt()ii \v;is l)Iii)fl, 
 
 Milt( 
 
 "1 wroto " IVinuliso Ust." 
 
 «. JY'^.-vIllovoQnoon Victor 
 
 Sh 
 
 i.'i. 
 
 c IS now "Empress of liid 
 
 Tlio toachor should luld 
 
 in. 
 
 combined 
 
 ni 
 
 any othor grcips of stuton 
 
 luiils U\ ha 
 
 -\--VVJ[. VE(!I!3_SIAU.I,E TENSES 
 1. Wliatis the .lc.(i„itio„ ot»vcri,?_^„^;,,, 
 
 '««/•<! an asscHton about .oraethhu,. 
 
 Now, an an^cHion mny I,e made in vario,,, w,™ 
 by changing the forn, of the verb uso<l. ^ 
 
 2. Suppose we .say, 
 
 l*auliue stands there. 
 
 fWJ 
 
64 
 
 LANGUAGE '.,; 
 
 c ,.lace ,of,.rro,l to. irowovor, wo ,„„y wis), ,„ 
 
 UXUil una \y(j> QX}^rc^<a in 'l><i 4". II 
 
 "^ «.A] I CSS ];^ iiu lollowiiig luannor; 
 
 J'atilipo stood UiQTc. 
 
 ^\ 
 
 c Ilia 
 
 y sav 
 
 I A 
 
 'tope t) s,H' you ; or, I hoped t 
 
 4. TIic <1,T] 
 
 op 
 'crciiec iK'twdcn Die ( 
 
 one of ^/;;,c. "Pauline stands 
 
 to SCO yon. 
 
 \vo HlatcMuciits is 
 
 tunc, niifl "Paul 
 
 n 
 
 J hone " — 
 
 rofc 
 iiio stood ''^ refers t 
 
 V>^ — liino].re.sent; '' J /„->;>cvr'— t 
 
 I'H to present 
 o time ^xAs^ 
 
 In lil 
 
 iiiatiiier tlic vcrh 
 
 UMc j»a,st. 
 
 |)rc.s^•;yr^s•^ time 
 
 ^.>«' in these statcinciit 
 
 s ex- 
 
 St on 
 
 Hilars fdHal on I'lo 
 
 occi 
 
 doi;i;;:;!J;i::^'^^ -^"--^ ^-o ^t 
 
 ^. 11 
 
 n. Tlio lliY' hm"n<l hvv^] 
 
 itiics. The GciinanTs loved 
 
 'tly. The 
 
 la- 
 
 .,, Z'-^' --^'-^^ some linos L; to ^,oct L 
 xith the verbs clian^ed •— 
 
 uiiir 
 
 ■foil 
 
 ow 
 
 I slioot 
 
 m arrou- into tlic ali 
 
 It falls to eartli, 1 k 
 
 I 
 
 \JY 
 
 HOW not wlierc 
 
 soswiflly itflies, tliesi-],t 
 
 Cannot f(;Ilow it 
 
 m its lliirjit. 
 
 WrUc tlie passage, mal. 
 
 (5. 'n 
 
 '"gall Uio V(!ibsr.>f,irto 
 
 1 TTIMB. 
 
 'IS diango of form is railed 
 
 aoliatinre (^i tense, imd "tons 
 
 » 
 
 thin 
 
 as ^/we. 
 
 HI grammar 
 iuoans just the same 
 
 The form of (lie verb donot: 
 
 called tho;>m'cv/^ tense; that deuo't 
 called i\iQ past tense. 
 
 ng time jirosent is 
 ing time past is 
 
IS now in 
 ly wish to 
 isc'iit time, 
 <-"- i.tvynth. 
 incr; 
 
 you. 
 
 t'liiciits is 
 :> present 
 inc ;>^^s•i. 
 >H' j»;ist. 
 iieiits ex- 
 
 I'tly. The 
 ' loved iu- 
 
 follow, 
 
 great tense of l,i,t:, 1 T. '" '*''' ^""''' '" "'« 
 
 -. Col„nl,u.,rf,,sT<»;«r,rAn.erieM. 
 
 shall or ?6w7/. " ^"^^^ h' n^mg 
 
 10 toictoll anyiliing. Tims— 
 1. We M.. .,3.to Europe next year. 
 ^. llioluMito:^ '^'V/kilUhe Iiou« 
 
 Exc. 
 
 se 25. 
 
 Write sentences, usiixr eacli of fl,n f n • 
 '■'"'"•'" "°"''"' '"I »rt'«i«to. of „„u.i,„. 
 
 > 
 
 •ainmar 
 ic same 
 
 ?scnt 18 
 past is 
 
 f.u!;rJI^'::r'C'' ,'"•■" \' '« -'y -.^y to fo„„ .„e 
 tUc past te, ; ^"' " '^ '""'■'•• •''•«!^'"" to form 
 
 I, 1 1 
 
ll 
 
 60 
 
 ^^U.vo aro ho.uc of the v- rl>s u-o h:u] in the last 
 
 Present Tenst. 
 Sliuul. 
 IIopo. 
 ISuil. 
 13 urn. 
 Admire. 
 IShoot. 
 Fall. 
 
 Know. 
 Fly. 
 
 J'i(^<t Tense, 
 
 Stood. 
 Jlojx'd. 
 Sailed. 
 JJiirned. 
 
 Adjnired. 
 Shot. 
 Foil. 
 Ivnow^. 
 
 3. A nnnihor of tl.oso verbs form their past tensos 
 'y add.n. the .nflix ed to thc'^ir ,,-esent tenses. 
 
 Olent.on some that do so.) Oihc-s do not form 
 heir ,,ast tenses in this way. For instance, stand 
 
 Has lor Its j)ast tense stood. 
 
 What h.-is " shoot ? •• " f.-Ul ? •"■ l,„nw ? ■' " fly ? '» 
 
 4. We have i,i Engli.sli several thousand verl)s 
 and all these verbs, with the exception of about one 
 liundred and iitty, form their past t< nse },y addln<. 
 
 verb' . ^?"T. '"'"''• '^^'"•''^^' ^^'^ '^^^ ^''^«>^ 
 veHjs, or verbs ot the weak conjugation. 
 
 5. The few verbs that form their past tense 
 I'y nioditying the vowel sound of the root are called 
 fwT-\''^ ; or verbs of the strony oonju-'ation. 
 (Which ot the verbs in the bst are wcalc '/ Which 
 are strong f) " 
 
 6. The past tense of I lorn is I lo^ed. We can 
 exj)ress the same thing by saying I did love 
 
 7. When we add cdt^ the p1-esent of a verb to 
 make Its past tense, great pains must be taken to 
 Have the spelling corr(!Ct. 
 
ill llio last 
 
 isi tonsos 
 L tenses, 
 ol ioi'in 
 e, iitand 
 
 Excrcis'j 26. 
 Conil.irio llie r..lI.,\viM<r vorhs in fl... . 
 
 j^j'toon,., u„t, .ovc, ,,„ p,.,,v., ,,.,, ,„;^_ 
 
 ^VIl ulnVh verbs nro,.c<,,,,i,,,,i,,,^.^^.^,^^^. 
 fnrwallt '"""" '''""^ ^^ '-• "I-"" the Ian,], a.ul „KU,y ,erishod 
 ^- My father soM,,i.rann.l,o„,,e wont to 3r,Mut.,,,a. 
 ^•IJ-Hn,t.,o.H.,,off.otstep 
 
 6. Wehope,lyo,Mvo,.,,,vi.ft„..vhc,.,l.oIeavosfoll 
 
 r 
 
 li 
 
 1 vcrl)s. 
 
 out ono 
 
 adding 
 
 d 'weak 
 
 i tense 
 3 called 
 i^'ation. 
 WJiich 
 
 i^e can 
 
 orb to 
 ken to 
 
 -XXI.V. VKIi,i.S-.C().MI>()UND TICySES. 
 fu.m-e ^''«I'--'--"t; 1". Tl,opa.st, 3. Tho 
 
 f, ■" "■'""•' ''"■'■"""^ "f ti„,c., it wouM seen tint 
 tlK..,o ,„„,t l,e nil the ten.c, th.t tl.orc oan bo 
 
 I »/..,«»«// . Is/udl/>ave„al/cea. 
 i- I .<:>ne walked h a!.i,„li,f prcvMit W 
 
 
 hi 
 
 J if 
 
 
 fl! 
 
 i 
 
h J 
 
 ^^ LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 yUccd a^inc yesterday. It is a ki.ul of present 
 tense, wuh then^eaning tl.nt at the present time the 
 action staled is completed. This mic.],t, therefore, 
 be called the present completed ; but in grammar it 
 IS usually named tlio present perfect-^^ j.erfect » 
 mc^mu^ perfected, that is, completed 
 
 6. J„ the same way I had walked is a i>ast tense ; 
 but n differs from the ordinary past, I walked 
 n<Mcdi^ indefinite: I walked this morni.,.., yes- 
 torday last year, etc. But I had walked to the 
 depot before the trciin arrived This is called the 
 vast perfect, and it makes a statement of somethhu^ 
 done in the past before somethinff else done in the 
 ])ast. 
 
 G. I shall have walked h called the future perfect 
 tense. It makes a statement of something that will 
 be done in the future before something else takes 
 place. Thus, I shall have walked to the depot 
 before the train will arrive. ' 
 
 7. The six tenses ar-—l. Present; 2. Past; 3. Fu 
 lure ; 4 Picscnt Perfect ; 5. Past Perfect ; 6. 
 t uture l^erfect. 
 
 ]\ist Cal or calls 
 
 Future .* if ' V'^' .„ 
 
 7V,.,sv »< Perfect. .'. u '"* V" ^""• 
 
 J'o^t PeriWL. : '^r 'V; '?' '"'''^'^• 
 
 Future A'/yto, . ." ". su u % , 
 
 *' 'sluiJl uv will have called. 
 
 J'-'^'^^^P^'esentpcrfect,pastpe?fect,niu}ftctureper^ 
 feet are called com])ound tenses, because they are 
 formed by means of iho verb have, and have is 
 cnlled an auxiliartj or helpiinr yerb. 
 
 U. The present tense of this helping verb hhave; 
 
It time tlie 
 
 tlierofore, 
 
 : ram mar it 
 
 ' i)orfect " 
 
 •ast tense; 
 I iculkcd. 
 •ning, yes- 
 Gd to tlie 
 called tlie 
 lometliing 
 ne in the 
 
 re ])erfect 
 : tliat will 
 'he takes 
 lie de2)ot 
 
 !t;3. Fu 
 •feet ; 6. 
 
 avo called. 
 
 tare pcr- 
 
 tliey are 
 
 haDc is 
 
 iti have / 
 
 VEUBS — CUMl'oUND TEXSES. 69 
 
 ti.e past is had; the future is .hall have. You cau 
 tenses •* ^^^^^^ ^^""'^^ ""'" ^""^"^ '" ^^' compound 
 
 Presmt Per red rr „ , 
 
 Past Perfect . . {?"/ «? "^^ 
 
 10. Now what is the other part-namely, « called ? " 
 
 1 he pupil may think Ihat this is the past tense of the 
 
 verb c«/^, smee we have seen that the past tense is 
 
 UHually tormed from the present tense by addim, ed. 
 
 11. Lut this IS not the ease. And ^ve may see 
 
 Umtit^jsnottheeasebytakingastnuu, yerblike 
 wrue. The past tense of write is wrote. Xo^y, would 
 you say I ,,,,e ,.rote, I had y^rote, I shall ha^e wrote / 
 Certamly not; you would say I have written, ,i,. 
 ^\^^ walked ^n I have waJked is no more the past 
 tense oi..ak than written is the past tense oLI^;;^ 
 
 1 -. 1 h,s torm of the verb used in forming the com- 
 pound te.s.s is called t}^^ per feat participle. 
 
 13. Ihe I orfect participle of all ^ceak verbs is the 
 same in form as their past tense. 
 
 Walk+ed=walked, rerfect Participle. 
 Loy-fed --cloved, Perfect Participle. 
 r.ob-f-ed=robbed, Perfect Participle. 
 14. The perfect participle of strong verbs is 
 formed in various ways. vtios .s 
 
 Tl,c perfect i>articij,Ie of ,yo is.' 
 
 « « „ '^" '« done. 
 
 •^'^^^ 18 • J alien. 
 
 J.e perfect iKirtin'pe of tli^ASV^i f' '''"'' '""''' '"■^ '"-I 
 I liavo knew; wo must sLvI 1 ., ' ^^^•■^"•^^' "'<' c;uin„t s.iv 
 perfect purticiple. '''^ ^ ^^^'" l<uown. aud Auowi is tUe 
 
70 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 (^ivc tli(. six ^.v/.s'cv of tl,c fulibwin- vcrl,H ■- 
 lioll. go, uamc, know, imcnt. fall, move, bring. 
 
 A'.\x. vKuns wiTirrnomum. 
 
 1. Vorl,s ,nM\,. statonionts ; and tl.oy can unko 
 Slut cHK.nt. not only of all nouns, but also of the ... 
 so?i(tl j)ronouns^ ^ 
 
 -. Tlio ])ersoiiaI i»rononns are •— 
 
 Thou or y.,.,, <lc.noti„g the person or person. 
 ^/^^ M^,;V, and Mc7/, denotin.,^ tl,e j,orson or t,ct 
 
 pumonn ot I.I10 tinrd 2^crson. 
 
 3. Now ink,. tiK. r,.rl, ,,„,«, W. onn .ny - 
 
 4. AV|,o„ wo arc speaking of <,!,o vc.-I«, we ..v tl.u 
 
 "•"^^•'-A ikon ...//';/;. ^" -' =7';'"' -l' tl.o von, : tilt, K 
 
 ^s. except in pooti aud , r vcr i,. 1'^'^ '"ir «•'"« <>"t 
 yuakors. ^ '*"'* IH.i.\ci, aud by the Friends, or 
 
VT.r.m WITH rnoNouNs. 71 
 
 5 In t1,c present tonsc thoro is only onool,an-o of 
 ■o/bm of thcvorl^that Is.tl.o tl,i,.^ pc-so, t: 
 
 ■"" ""= * *" •^™'-'' "f tl'" tlnnl ,,er.so„ sin-mlar in tl„. 
 
 6. In tho past tenso no niistakos can 1,,,. marto f„r 
 the reason that tho verl, ,locs not .han^o it, f^ m 
 
 ;•"" "'7, "/ "- i"-"-onn. It is-i, /;,, ;" .:" 
 
 tlioy walked. ^ ' ' ' 
 
 7 TI.e future l.as no d.nuges : it is^T you ],e 
 W'c, tlicy shall or ?/.',7/ .^vi//.-. ' ^ ' ' 
 
 ;ih^ , T "^^"'■^"' -"^'^'^^n ^.s,l.oA.. , 
 ^v.lIk(,], J>ut I, you, Avo, tlu.y W. M-alk.a. 
 
 10. The future perfect is shall or null lav, 
 walked, with all the pronouns. 
 
 Tl^e fouowi,., Httlo ta.,0 win .,iow you n,o w,.... n.ttor at a g.anc. 
 
 ^;;:!f ''"'- wu.,c,u.,i.„. 
 
 J iixt tense YV'.,ii . 
 
 rutnreinise c,,,,,, 
 
 t:";"''f'"- .;;:r;u'u' ''■""'''''''■ 
 
 ^"<u«iW-,<-« Sl-M .„. >vii, l„.vo wal„ed. 
 
 Exercise. 28 
 
1. 1 
 
 70 
 
 I'ANr.UAOTC LESSON'S. 
 
 xxxr. MOODS OF vq^ins. 
 
 -^^^a'±''^;;-^r^^^^ tl,at t^. io.on be 
 
 for thoDiTseiit if nimii^ i,,,,..,, / tvuce. it wjll bo enoii" 1 
 
 ""'"•■iu-lat„ro tlKuroF S/- , .7 r;'*'"' l...w'--v..r, rati,,.,- of 
 
 to u later .<ui,^c^ ' •^''^■^'"•'"''""•'^'y l>u postiMmod 
 
 1. VcHwin En-i;sl,],;,vo four moods 
 
 (^0 A^^^^;./.i6'^/^e J/oo.^- as if I wrote, ihoxvAx ho 
 sl(vj mo. J o lu 
 
 (C-) 7»y,«-„««,. Mood: as y?nV,i, m„ your book. 
 I^cncl Imii a pound. 
 
 {d) Infinitive Mood : as lio onnw/.^.- You miv 
 «ee, I must go, -^ 
 
 i2. Tlie six tenses that wo Iiavo dofincd all diffor in 
 regard to tinio ; but Hay all agroo in makin^/tbo 
 
 l^r^ " r ''*:' 'f "^'^ tnkln, place, and notas 
 ^^_^^rcVy ^Ao^.yA^ of. All thoso tcn.^s agrco in indioa- 
 ting somo fact; and l.onoo thoyaro said to bo tonsos 
 of the indicative mood Mood, o- mode, nioans wav 
 or manner. ■^ 
 
 3. A second ^ray of making a statement is by moans 
 of the .uhjicnatice mood. The .>d>}nnctice mood is 
 tha form of the verb by means of which an event is 
 ^^poken of not nj^ a matter of fact, but as mereh, 
 thought of; as, If he see the signal, Tfhe haoe .een the 
 signal, etc. The subjunctive mood is genorallv 
 though not necessarily, preceded by one(.f tlie cun' 
 junctions, if that, lest, though, wdes^^ &,,. 
 
 4. A third way of using a verb is in giving a com- 
 mand, as, Come / Go / This is called the imperative 
 
MOODS OF 7RRns. 
 
 73 
 
 id loHsnn be 
 1)0 oii()n;,'h 
 
 of il Vt'tl). 
 
 It, fuid tlio 
 
 •, r;itl:cr of 
 
 liii^ti'oiieil 
 
 e, I have 
 f)ugli ho 
 
 ir book. 
 
 "^ou may 
 
 liffor ill 
 
 ing tht^ 
 
 l1 not as 
 
 iiidlca- 
 
 i tCJIlSOS 
 
 ns w ay 
 
 moans 
 100(1 is 
 vent is 
 merdi/ 
 
 eraily, 
 ic cun- 
 
 i com- 
 rative 
 
 :r::r:::i:'"^'''''"''^''''^^''"'-"— «- 
 
 u"!;;";-?,'" /'."'i«' '■' -'-1. a verb 
 
 S. Tl,e,-c i.s «till nM.,ll„.r r.,n,. of the verl,. Tl.is is 
 
 't- J l.i.s, «o w«//t, to rid,', to run, to love. Tl.is in 
 nanicl the j«/«»V«(,6. mood. 
 
 6. TJ,e i„fi„itive mood can really be ,„c<l as a noun 
 Thus I may say, To rule is pleasant exorcise • o " I 
 ■kc to rule. In the first o.«n,,,lc, to n'* is ,0"'. 
 
 o.m ot ve.l, that is very much nsc.l. This iscalle.l 
 t^^pre.entpa,-llelple. The present ,,art,eipU 
 verbs .s to™,ed by a.hllng ,;,, to thesin.pll. for,,: 
 
 Walk- + mg.^„„„,i„. ^^^„^^^^ ;„„,,•,,>/«. 
 J^oye + ing=lovi„j,, pmsct participle. 
 Kob + ing^robbing, present participle. 
 -' * V + "ife'^flyiiiS, prcseitt participle. 
 
 cUaII'IT'''" '°'''" '"""•"'' ■'-'•^■•y careful to in- 
 cI.Kle^,I J,e part, needed to make tl,c state.neut. 
 
 • 1. The builders will commenee to-day. 
 Here elie verb is wUl commnvt 
 
 2. The sun w«/ ,et before eight o'clock. 
 Ue,-e tlie verb Is will set. 
 
 n 
 
** i^ANfiUAOK I.KSKONR. 
 
 3. J shall not go to bcIiooI to-day. 
 
 Here tlio verb is shall <jo ; tlic word not coinc« between 
 tlie two parts of the verb. 
 
 4. Kcver again shall my brotliers embrace mo. 
 
 Ilore tlie verb is shall anhrace, the two luirts arc soia. 
 rated by tlio words my bivUicra. 
 
 UKFEREXCK TAI5LE OF ALL TUK MOODS AXD TENSKS 
 
 OF A VKliJi. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. • 
 
 f'resent i love. Presciit. . . , (7/) I lovo. 
 
 ''"*■' Moved. J'ast (/>) ! loved. 
 
 l'r,M'7U prr/rct I b.ivo loved. I'rcs. per/. (Jj) I hiiKr iovf<l etc 
 
 J'dst prrUrt I llild lo\cd. 
 
 ^'vtiirt' 1 .«li;iil .,/• will love. 
 
 Future perfect 1 sh:ill or will luive loved. 
 
 Imperative. * Infiuitive. Participles 
 
 [x.ve (tliou To lovo. Lovin-' 
 
 O'-youi. 1,,,,.,," 
 
 To ii:i\o loved. IJuviii;,' loved. 
 
 Exercise 2g, 
 
 Tell the mood and the tense of eaeh verb in the 
 following .sentences : — 
 
 1. The vill.-i.ire boll rin-s. 2. Tl.e .storm Ims cen.sed. ? 
 MiowiU rouiiim. if .yo,. w...!, l^cr to do ..o. 4. Tlie iii<'r<l.;,nt 
 s loiild learn n.ore (•auti.m. f,. The s..verci;;n.s ro.|u...t..d oi 
 < oliinilui.^ ;i rrutal ol hi;* Rdvei.tiire.^. (1. I have co.i.i.lctod 
 .nytwelthyeur. 7. Yo,, l,;ul for^nU..,, to j;iv,. ;,n u..sun S 
 Me »<hall hiive left brf..re they arrive, y. iJa^te iiiv lalhrv's 
 hoiutto cheer. 10. The landlord aclud in u diirerent n.anner 
 11. My ste!...iuii.rht brf-ak Yonr n'^:t. Vi. Antweri.'^ n,orU;s 
 W .^ng a lu.-^j... h)r thy i.oor (.pearnieu'H souls. VX \Winm 
 .Saturday I shall have niatnrod all my phuLS. 14 \Vh« stcdn 
 
 /'», 
 
I'ASSIVK VKIiHS. 
 
 7d 
 
 XXXll PAS.SIVK VKItns. 
 
 I wrote Die lottcr. '. 
 
 Tlic letter was written by me. 
 
 1. In r;,o first c.f tl.ese sontccos the verb state,,, 
 Kit the subject (I; c/.V/ something; in the seeon.l,. 
 .he verb represents som-.thir.g as c/c..,c to the sull. 
 lect (the letter). 
 
 2. These forms of rej.resenting t])e sM],jret d^ 
 rctu,r/ or ^^h>.; acted .pan) are ealle<l the acUoe 
 wiceimd ilwpa.sfiiue voice. 
 
 3. The passive voice is formed by wsing the vari- 
 
 >us parts of the verb ^. with the perfect .articiplc- 
 )i a verb. ^ 
 
 liEFEIil'XCE T.\BI,E OF TilK Vi:i;n /JK 
 
 Indicative Moorf 
 
 Present Tense. Past Tnse. 
 
 ■ atn. 
 .^'?i()ii art. 
 Ma is. 
 •\'o ;iio. 
 i'oii JllO. 
 riicy .'ire. 
 
 I liavo l)ron. 
 Tiiou liiist linen 
 llo li;is Ijouii. 
 We liHvc bc(>n. 
 You luCve 1)0011. 
 'liicy Jiave beew 
 
 I was. 
 
 TIioii w.'i.st. 
 Ho w;is. 
 \\'(i wore. 
 Yoii wore. 
 Tliey were. 
 
 Present P. r/eci, Pust Perfect. 
 
 I h:u] 1)0011. 
 'i'lidu li;!(l;-itbecii 
 He Jijid 1)0011. 
 ^^■e 1i;i(l been. 
 Yuii li;i(l been. 
 They had boeu. 
 
 Fxitxiic Tenae, 
 
 I .sli.'ill be. 
 Thou wilt ho. 
 Ho will be. 
 Wo sliull he. 
 You will bo. 
 They will bo. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 r sJiall h.'ive l)oen, 
 i huu wilt have been. 
 He wilt have been. 
 J\e shall have been, 
 ion will have been. 
 Ihey will have heeu. 
 
76 
 
 Present Tense, 
 
 Iff 
 
 If thou 
 Iflio 
 If we 
 
 If .VOU 
 
 If thoy 
 
 1 
 
 ba 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Past Teiuc. Present Perfect teme 
 
 • have been. 
 
 I f I were. 
 
 If I 
 
 If tlioii wort. 
 
 If thou 
 
 If liH were. 
 
 Jf he 
 
 If wo were. 
 
 If we 
 
 If you v/ere. 
 
 If vnu. 
 
 If they were. 
 
 If tliey 
 
 Imperative Mood- 
 Be. 
 
 • Infinitives. 
 
 Prtaent, To be Pa-feet, To have been 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Irnpcr/ect, Being. Perfect, Been. Conumtnd Perfect, Il.ivin-; 
 been. 
 
 4. Only tliose verbs that can take an oljcct after 
 them (transitive verbs) can be made j)assive. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 By reference to the table, tell tlie mood and tcjise 
 of each verb : 
 
 1. He was killed. 2. They nave been deceived. .'?. She h;id 
 l)cen tieen. 4. You will l)e beaten. 5. They will h;ivo been suni- 
 nioned. 6. I .am convinced of its truth. 7. The cord will bo cut 
 jibove the knot. 8. Have you been tan^Mit music ? <). Alfred 
 wan sheltered in tlie cotta2:e of a poor cowherd. 10. He himself 
 was accu.stomed to recite thi.s story in his ha|i|)ier hours. 11. The 
 British trooj.s were .advancing from Portugal into Si.ain. 12. 
 Yours has been forgotten. 13. Theirs will do. 14. Sir ,Tohu 
 Moore was wounded in the action by a cannon-ball. 15. II<» 
 Vr-ould in th.at ea.se be punisiicd, IVi. Time wilt have been wast(Mi 
 witliout any result. 17. Are you mistaken ? 18. In a few minutes 
 be would have been drowned. i;t. liv a series of criminal euter- 
 prises, the liberties of Europe had b'eeu extinguished. 20. Are 
 you satisfied ? 
 
itiftjjGULAii visiins. 
 
 77 
 
 hi 
 
 i tense 
 
 been. 
 
 leon. 
 
 ct, Il.ivinj: 
 
 'ict after 
 e. 
 
 lul tcfise 
 
 Slio l);ul 
 )ci!ii siim- 
 'iU 1)0 t;ut 
 9. Alfred 
 [e liiinsolf 
 
 11. The 
 .;iiii. 12. 
 Sir .loll II 
 . 15. IIh» 
 eii vv;ist(i(I 
 V iniimtes 
 Hill cutor- 
 
 20. Are 
 
 XXXIII STRONG VEllUS. 
 
 1. Weak verbs, or verbs of the weak oon j„^.ation 
 |mn their pa^ tc.se (indicative) and perl;; 
 .cM>Ie by add.ng .,/ to the present. Verl>s that 
 
 fonn these parts by modifying the vowel sound of 
 
 the root are called stro?if/ vei-bs. 
 
 Jlu^V""''! ''"'"' ^''''' '^"•^^' -'"'^^ P^''-f^'«t par- 
 tuple of a verb are called its ;>rmc-^.// ;..r^,s, for 
 .0 reason that, having these, m'c can easily fo.-n all 
 the other ])arts of the verb. 
 
 f..ffiui.ov'si;;';^^:;^i;i^7'^^'^ ^•«''^« -'- sovanod m 
 
 will 1,0 f„„„cri„tlo«upilZeri;t\"S ^ '•'""'''"^^' "'^^ 
 
 are hero -iivcii : ^ ^ 'i^ineiu , unt a few of the most iiuj,ortaut 
 
 I. 
 
 Present Past. Perfect Part. 
 
 IJic-vk, hroKe, broken 
 l-orsake, forsook, fcjisaken. 
 
 Jake, took, taken. 
 
 U ear, wore, Avorn. 
 
 Wraw, drew, diawu. 
 
 olay, giew, slaiu. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I':at, 
 
 Freeze, 
 
 Speak, 
 
 i5e-in. 
 
 Drink, 
 
 Give. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Prrfcct Part 
 
 ate, 
 
 eaten. 
 
 froze, 
 
 frozon. 
 
 spoke. 
 
 spoken. 
 
 be -an. 
 
 be^i^iiii. 
 
 drank. 
 
 drunk. 
 
 save. 
 
 given. 
 
 Correct the following errort In verba ; 
 
 l«»-id. .5. ] have novoi .f,. ?"i • ■''^ (Imwcd a hbTvv 
 
 Knu,K.iu..n^v^.oK.ie io : ^;'.;:^;,f"'f'■i;^"r' - ^'''i-. <^ 
 
 you were uut couung. 8. The witor walfr J.e. °"" ^"^ *'''"^ 
 
 II. 
 
 Present. P^ist. Perfect Port l Present 
 
 Lie, 
 
 Lav, 
 
 ^Vrite, 
 
 Know, 
 
 Come, 
 
 Catdi, 
 
 lav, 
 
 laid, 
 
 wrote, 
 
 Iviiew, 
 
 lain. 
 
 laid. 
 
 written. 
 
 known, 
 came, come, 
 caught, caught. 
 
 Past Perfect ^nrt 
 
 Hod, 
 flew. 
 
 fled, 
 flov « 
 
 paw, 
 rose, 
 stole. 
 
 seen, 
 risen. 
 Ktoleu 
 aat. 
 
 
7S I.ANtJt'AdK l,hSSON.S. 
 
 Cyrrout tho lullowiii;* onors in veil. a : 
 
 1. John Ims \vr..tn ;i, le(t<>r. 2. Tlic sim lias mso. .'5. F seo liim 
 ycstorilay. 4. 'I'lio binls havo (low luvay. r.. Tim -at rate!' ed n 
 luoiisn. (]. The bouli lays on tlio tahlo. 7. Mo laid on tli'j ^o(a 
 8. I kuowpd lin liad went. 0. The girl was scon -om,:,' tip tlio liill. 
 10. The lien sets on lier c^^gs. 
 
 3. Tho pupil li.is often Lccii told tlifit « I done it " 
 is nn.l Kno-lisli, and al.so that " I havo nrnt " is had 
 Eni^dish. Wo must ho particularly cai oful to avoid 
 such errors. 
 
 4. Tho i)rincipal parts of the vQvhfh aro : present 
 tense, ^?o/ pa.st tense, '■.?/ p(Tfeet i)articiple, c^a;<c. 
 
 5. The person \vh" .vays "T dc 
 
 one It means to 
 make a statement of v^n time, just as if wc Avere to 
 say, I walked. Now, thu pa.st tense of do is did ; 
 hence the only way of makinu the statement intend- 
 
 ed is to say, " I did it, 
 
 ?> 
 
 n. The won! d> 
 
 o/i 
 
 e is \\\o perfect p((rtic!ph of tho 
 verb do ; hut i i)artici}>le cannot by itself make any 
 statement at all ; so that I done it is utter nonsense. 
 If you were to say. He gone to town, it Avould be 
 just as sensible as to say I done it. 
 
 1. Tell, for tho same roa-^on, why " John drunk some water " 
 Is wrong 
 
 2. Tell why " We scm an elephant" is bad Enj,'lish. 
 
 7. Tho mistake in ^^Iham toent^' {?, in usin<T a 
 past tense instead of a ])orfect })articiplc to form a 
 compound tense. The present perfect tense of tlie 
 verb go is intended ; viz., " I have gone " 
 
F sen l\!ni 
 
 r;it(r 0(1 a 
 
 til') ^:o(.l 
 
 iptlio hill. 
 
 'J<^))C it " 
 ' is 1,;i.i 
 to avoid 
 
 rnnASKs wirrr rAnTir-irr.^s. 
 8. Aiinflior vcrv (m 
 
 79 
 
 18 sJiown 111 tlicse sentcncGs :— 
 
 I C0W6 to town tills inornin^r. 
 He cowc to my store. 
 
 Tlio scntenoo sliould bo, " I o,,rnP u^ tn»-„ n • 
 
 present 
 lo, do)ie. 
 
 lonns to 
 Avcre to 
 is (ltd ; 
 intcnd- 
 
 of llio 
 like anv 
 •risen so. 
 )ukl bo 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 Correct tlic errors in vorl.s in the following sen- 
 tcnees, ami tell the nature of the mistakes :- "^ 
 
 as 1.0 ouu. Louis, 'hu \ t ; ; '^ ,.. ;".•';';- '"^^ •'!''"'< - ""-■'' 
 
 li;is hinko liis word. | s.^o U tl ^ '','.?' ""'-''^'- '^''''^t hov 
 
 Juno liiirf l.e-u!i to sualy (ion ,'u ^ ''"'■' '•' '^^•'i"l""lly w..ve. 
 
 e water 
 
 isiiijx a 
 
 form a 
 
 of the 
 
 XXXIV,, PHRASES WITir PARTICIPLES. 
 
 1. We have so far seen that there are three «^r. 
 hciples-^,^ present, the ,,ast, an.l the perfeet. It 
 -important that we understand what participle 
 are, for they are used in making ;;/,m,,,. ^ 
 
 2. A participle is ho called becanse it p^rn'm^a/., 
 or shares partly i„ the nature of a verbf and ^ 
 
 Mil 
 
 lit 
 

 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 h 
 
 /. 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 i/.x 
 
 ^6 
 
 I 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 £ \& 12.0 
 
 L25 i 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 \ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 IN^ ^ <!» Wei. 
 
 i\ 
 
 '1j"^" ■•^''^'*" 
 
 > 
 
,^ 
 
 
 i? 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
80 
 
 LANGUAGE LliSSONS. 
 
 of an adjective. A verb is a statoinont-word ; but 
 a participle can only participate \u makiug a state- 
 ment. 
 
 1. The river is Jlovnng. 
 
 Here " is flowintr " is a verb, nnd " flowing." the present 
 participle, helps to form this verl). " presciu 
 
 2. The v'wQY.Jiowing from the mountains, watois 
 the phiin. 
 
 Here the participle " flnwinj?" docs not makoanvsMtement- it 
 is an adjective, and " llowinj,' from the mountains " is a phrase. 
 
 3. The Nile is hwicn to rise in Abyssinia. 
 kno^^^ *''^ ^^^* purticiple " known " forms part of the verb is 
 
 4. Tlie Nile, komon to rise in Abyssinia, flows 
 through Egypt. 
 
 Here tlie past participle " known " maken no statement, nnd 
 
 li,l"*T''L^Hn ,'''«''" ' ''"' e.xprcssion "known to rise inAh'-l 
 Diimi IS cv pniasei ■ 
 
 3. A number of separate statements' with par- 
 ticipial phrases may be combined into a single sen- 
 tence. 
 
 J^xa7)ii>Ic 1. 
 
 1. Tlie gallant soldier fell. 
 
 2. He was covered with wounds. 
 
 By taking out from the second statement the phrase •' eoverfd 
 
 reiicV'-" '' ""'" '^ '"'*' ''"" ''''■"^' "« i''U'c tir s[m^ 
 
 The gallant soldier fell, covered with wounds ; 
 or, Covered with wounds, the gallant soldier fell. 
 
 jL'j.xnjiple '2. 
 
 1. We saw (I beautiful landscape. 
 
 2. We had dimbed to the top of the hill. 
 
 3. The landscape was stretched below us. 
 
 

 COXJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Thxj fiisl is tlic principal Htatemont. T 
 two .stat»;monts into jthruscs, and coinl 
 witii the ininoipjil ttatonicnt, we J 
 
 81 
 
 ransfonninj; tlie otiier 
 niii- tlieso two plinises 
 
 lave the lullowin^r sentence :— 
 
 Having climbed to tlie lop of the lull, 
 
 beautiful landscape stretched belo 
 
 we saw a 
 
 w us. 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 Combine oacli sot of =.'at( inouts into a single 
 sentence with phrases. 'lUe ])rincii»al statement 
 comes first. 
 
 1. I lay clown to rest. I was exhausted by latigne. 
 
 Thl V'r"^ ^''^ nonVmg in the ocean an tninicnse irro-„lar nn^<, 
 L.t tbe tMohor mak. up addition.) ». „ ,« to bo oomblnod. 
 
 ■•f 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 XXXV. CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 France and Switzerland are republics. 
 I went because lie asked mo. 
 1. The M'ord "and" makes one statement out of 
 wliat otherwise must be two : France is a rej)ublic, 
 
 '1 
 
 'M 
 
 in 
 
8'J 
 
 f,.\N(iUAtili: LKSSUNS. 
 
 S\vil/,t'rl;iii(l is a rciniblic. Tlio worti "lu'ciiise" 
 comu't'ts tlio two stMtcnicnts " I wonl" and "Jjo 
 asked me" into one sentenee. 
 
 jiiul and Jirrtnisr aru called I'niijtmctiDiis. 
 
 2. .])KKi.\rri()V. — Conjunctions are connective 
 words which have neither a pronominal nor 
 an adverbial signification, 
 
 Tlioy arc called conjnnetions Lecauso llicy join 
 wonls an<l sentenees toiretlier. I>nt y/V/,o, v'/Vi/rA, 
 and f./ifU are prnnonn,^^ nnd yet tliey connect sen- 
 tences. And in like manner, ?/V/f.7/, ?^'/i^??vj, &e., !iro 
 advai'hs and tliey also connect sentences. Other 
 connective words are c(»njnnctions. 
 
 1. Polly and A\\mv sini^f sweetly. 
 
 2. The ship sails swiftly, aUhonf/h she is lieavily 
 laden. 
 
 "And" is a crmjniu'tion. odniioctiiicr statoniontH by -joining 
 tlic two nouns of tlio .siil)j(Ht, "riilly" ami "Annie." 
 " AUli()iiL;h " introduces a duiieiulciit staloincnt. 
 
 3. Dkfixtttox. — Co-ordinate conjunctions 
 connect words or statements c c same rank 
 in a sentence. 
 
 4. There is another class of conjunctions, called 
 subordinate conjunctions. 
 
 ILLUSTUATIONS. 
 
 1. I will not go unles? yon accompany me. 
 
 2. I will lielp you, if you wisii me to do so. 
 
 "lJnU>SH"iH u conjunction, cniiiioclJiit; tii(! two st-itenicntH 
 "I will not p)" and" you accouiiiauy iuo." "If" is .'v cnn- 
 jnncUon, coinicctini,' the two statements " I will help you " 
 and " you wish nio to do so." 
 
 5. l)EFixiTio>r. — Subordinate conjunctions 
 connect a qualifying or dependent statement 
 with a principal statement. 
 
 6. The princij)al co-ordinate conjunctions arc 
 and, Imt, or, therefore. The principal subordinate 
 coiijuuctioiis arc that^ {/', thuayhi unless. 
 
 
 i:-'|: 
 
niHVIEW LESSOR. 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 A. 
 
 Name llio conjunction.'^, .mihI tell wlu'tlio^ 
 arc co-ordindte or subordinate. 
 
 }■ I WClit fil'st. nild llO foll..U0(] ,110 ^ Voifl.nr .. IT 
 
 fi.Hil..r8 iH.uI.l a.lvuM.'o. .'!. I will t H Kh.rif i , ' '''' 
 
 'mil hccjiiiso 10 list Invc.l li I- I \.'> •^' "■' *•• •'• >\ 
 
 d3 
 
 they 
 
 ors nor 
 4. No 
 
 <i Invcil 
 it Jour 
 
 i!l 
 
 B. 
 
 ...t.o„ in tlio omi; :{.' ContoniimM t' is bo. "^ ' i ;:;r'"VlV' 
 
 7. DEFixrnox.-Interjections express sud- 
 den or strong feeling. 
 
 |p 
 
 ' ^1 
 
 XXXVI. REVIEW LESSON 
 
 I— The Parts of Speech- 
 
 1. Words are ,livl,lea into eight classos, cdled 
 Jic jiarts of si)eecli. Those are— 
 
 1. Nouns. 
 
 2. Pronouns. 
 
 3. Adjeetives. 
 
 4. Verbs. 
 
 0. Adverbs. 
 0. P'-ej)ositiona. 
 7. Conjunctions. 
 
 8. Interjections, 
 
 
1 1 
 
 if 
 
 84 LANGUAOB LESSONS. 
 
 I. Noun3 are nameS' 
 
 IT. Pronouns stand for noims. 
 
 HI. Adjectives describe OF limit things. 
 
 IV. Verbs make statements- 
 
 V. Adverbs describe actions and qualities. 
 
 vr l'rop(»sitii)ii3 .... .join words- 
 
 VII. (joiijii nations comicct words orstatonionts- 
 
 VIII. liiiorjuciiuiis express sudden and strong 
 
 feeling. 
 
 2. iMroiiTAN^T DiRKCTiox. — Til tolling the parts 
 of spcccli, pupils must boar in mind that it is the 
 meaninf/ of a word tluit dotorminos tlie ol.iss to 
 which it belongs. The same word may be any one 
 of two or three parts of 8]>ecch, according to its 
 meaning in tlio soiitonce. Thus : — 
 
 1. Pcoi)lc tliat live in glass liouscs should not 
 throw stones. 
 
 Tlio word "ijjl.'iss" in thi.^ sentence is an ndjcctine, bccanso 
 it (lcstM'ilie.>< tho thinji;, " /lo^.se.s'." In t!ie scntgnco, "Windows 
 arc niado ot (jlaas,'' tlia same word i.s a noun, becanse here it 
 is a name. 
 
 2. Sometimes we see a ship ; sometimes we 
 ship a sea. 
 
 The first word "slnn" in this sentence i.s a noun^ becan.se 
 it is the name of a llung : the second "ship" is a lov^, be- 
 cause it makes a statement. 
 
 3. Without one if ov but. 
 
 The words "if" and "but" are usually con/unc<io?i3, as 
 here used thoy arc nouns. 
 
 4. Come to mo at four o'clock, that [conjunc 
 tion] I may show you how to do that [adjective] 
 puzzle that [pronoun] I got for you. 
 
 As a review exerclae, lot the pupils open thoir Rfi.aders and teU th? 
 parts of B|ieecli lu ^ number of pasaagoij, 
 
REVIEW LESSON. 
 
 IL— Inflection of Words. 
 
 85 
 
 3. The same word may l»e nsod in various ways, 
 to express ll.e same thin- .IJflVrently. But we must 
 Mien alter tlie form of th.. word, to suit tl.o inteiulrH] 
 change of tliou-hf. S,„I. ehan-cs in tlie form of 
 M'ords are eallod Injlcvtlons. 
 
 4. Five of ilio ci,<r],t classes of words ehant,^e lh(>ir 
 form ; that is, are b,flvctcd. These are nouns, pro- 
 nouns, adjectives, adverbs, and verbs. Tlnve— 
 prepr,sitions, conjunctions, and interjections— are 
 not inflected ; that is, they undergo no change. 
 
 5. A noun is inflected to mark the plural 
 number and the possessive case. 
 
 x!?uh\' Xl!"'lSA'hJlonM.ftiu;?, yVr'^' ""' ""V"«. review Ice.ons TX.. 
 X VU, ^M\.\o^\ (;t tho poHsesMivo ease, review LosBon 
 
 6. Pronouns are changed to express person, 
 number, gender, and case. 
 
 she, it. ^ ' ' "'^"'^ ^'''"'"' y«" : '^'■'•'^ V<ir^on, l.o, 
 
 «Ae!LTd1^f I'Jl?! ' '' "^ •• ^' y«" («'^' '--. ^^--) 5« you ; of he. 
 diKlrwoXfor;!? '"•'^r""?^ the third person aloi.e hns 
 
 BfWSIV 
 
 nouns, review Lwsou XX v! 
 
 7. Adjectives and adverbs are inflected to 
 express the comparative and the superlative 
 aegrer ^ 
 
 if 
 
 I 
 
 I, 
 
 i, ', 
 
 I 1 ■! 
 
 ■ I 
 
 i.'\ 
 
 'm 
 
 III 
 
86 
 
 LANGUAOK LESSONB. 
 
 IHT" Tlio iiifloction for tlio comiifirativo do-irro of ndjoctivps 
 ami ;ulvorl)s is tlio siiilix cr ,• for tlio siiik rliitivo dfnico, Urn 
 Hillix est. For tli(^ coiiipurii^on of iul jcctiviis, rcvir'w Lrsson 
 XIV. ; for the i-oiuiiiirison of adverlw, rii'view Lesson XVIII. 
 
 8. Verbs aro infloct(Ml to nmrk tlio j.ersoii and 
 ihijiiIkt of tlifir subjects m only two iiislaiu'cs, as 
 Rocn on ])a!jfo 75. 
 
 (1) Tlioyurc ulso inflected to nmik the diffoient tcnson and 
 liartioii)lo8. 
 
 (2) Ell is added to .all weak verbs to form tlm past toiiso and 
 tlie perfect iiartifijile. Tlie jiiist tense and the pcil'cit participle 
 of strong; veihs are formed in a yre;it variety of ways. 
 
 (^) hui is tlie inflection fortlie iiresent participle of nil vorlis 
 Tilt! otiicr oliaii-cs in verbs are made, not by inllfction, bnt by 
 the Mso of aiixiiiary uoids. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 Tell t]io i7>Jlecti07is in the follow inir wor<ls ; "-Ivo 
 the simjdo form of the word, and tell the huc of 
 tlie hillection : — 
 
 m 
 
 , i;t!^ 
 
 MonKL.— Child's : apostrophe with s is an inflection added to 
 •the siin[)le form of the noun c7u7ti, and marks the iiossessivo 
 • silly ular. 
 
 1. Boy's. 2. Sleeps. 3. Flowing. 4. Flowers. 5. Sweeter, 
 fi. Tnlied. 7. Children's. 8. Nicest. 0. riercinjf. 10. Given. 
 11. llor.scs'. I'J. UisiniT. 13. Taxes. 14. Whitest, l.n. Vonrefl. 
 10. ('oar.scr. 17. IJlesscd. IH. Girl'.*. !!>. Ships. 20. Ship's. 
 21. Fishin.!,'. 22. Fishes. 2.'l Oxen. 24. Fairest. 2r>. Lowlier. 
 2(1. Hallowed. 27. Skies. 2,S, One'.s. 20. llannts. 'Ml Ye.ar's. 
 ;^1. Hours. 32. His. .'«. Faster. M. V.arnislied. .T.. Sheep's. 
 31). Coldest. 37. Loveliest. 38. Hurried. 3D. Slcepinj?. 40. 
 Heaveii'a. 
 
 XXXVII. ANALYSIS OF SIMPLE SEXTEXCKS. 
 
 1. A simple sentence makes a single statement, 
 by means of one subject and one predicate. 
 
 2. TJ.ip analysis of a sinijije sentence consists in 
 
ANAKVHlS Ol*" SlArM.lJ SfiN rKNci:R. 
 
 J<7 
 
 ndjoctivna 
 U'l^rco, (lio 
 
 Will. 
 
 •son nnd 
 aiu'os, as 
 
 tonsp.« and 
 
 toiiso nnd 
 
 |i.'ii'li('i|)l(! 
 
 nil voi'ltx 
 on, but hy 
 
 Is ; rrive 
 
 ! HttC of 
 
 I nddod to 
 liossc's.sivc 
 
 Swector. 
 10. Givoii. 
 '». I'oiiiod. 
 :0. «]ii|.'s. 
 . Ln\vli(!r. 
 0. Yeur's. 
 . Slioep's. 
 [liii}?. 40. 
 
 :xcEs. 
 
 It em en t, 
 nsists in 
 
 I'<>5i.(ing o„t the subject and tl.c i.ro.liratc, nn.l llic, 
 enlMr-crnent or enlar-enicnts, if any, of the subject 
 and ot the predicate. 
 
 ^^^^The sin.ple subject of a simple sentence may 
 1. A noun ; 2. A j.ronoun ; 3. A j.hrasc. 
 
 IM.L'STJIATIONS. 
 
 1. ('oU is a metal. Wal/duf/ is ^ ^od exercise, 
 jl.e sNl»Jeet of tbe first sentence is the n<.un 
 "1,'old ;" of the second, the noun "wa,lkin^^" 
 
 ti. Wo hear the music. The subject is tl^e i.ro- 
 noun " we." 
 
 3. 7h walk is good exercise. The subject is the 
 phrase "to walk." 
 
 4 Fhhhu,for trout is fine fun. The subject 
 IS the phrase "fishing for trout." 
 
 1. Tlie snow fell heavily. 2. Writing Ictt. ••. was: 
 
 •er daily occupation. 3. We ^re brothers. 4. Ta 
 
 torget an mjury is the mark of a noble mind. .5. 
 
 l..it day I oft remember. 6. Books are not 
 
 nead thmufs. 
 
 1. A verb by itsclt-if tl,e verb is a con,,,lete 
 
 2. A verb and its comploment-if the verb i« 
 an incomplete verb. 
 
 NoTR.— All trnvRitive ver1)^~tlnt lo ,.«»k 
 is culled tho ol^^!^ ^''J"^^-'^^*^ mcomulcte. Their couiplemcut 
 
 
 f \- 
 
88 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 Tlic vc b be, iiiwl .'I fow voihs tliat roiitaiii the sonsp. of tlie verb 
 hf, !is hi('(i/}i(\ .<t<i7/i, feel, etc., tnko, jih tlieir coiiiiilcmcnt, either 
 im juljpctivo (culled praiicatc iuljcctive) ov n unun (caWtnl j>i'cdi(:atc 
 iiomiiiittivc). 
 
 5. In tlio KontoDce Jiirds shif/, llie verb " sing " 
 is tlic jinvlioali' ; "sing" is a ('oinj>lc'te verl>; that 
 is, it makes full sense by itself. 
 
 6. In tlie sentenco (^(thonhtm discovered America^ 
 tlic sini])le jiredicalc is " discovered America!" Tlie 
 verb "discovered" alone does not form tlie i)redi- 
 cate, l)ecausc "(Jolumbus discovci'ed'''' does not 
 make coni])letc sense. " Discovered " is an incom- 
 plete verb. 
 
 7. T/ie sl'if is hlue. Here the simple jn'edicate is 
 " is blue." The verb he is here an incomi)lcte verb. 
 
 8. "When the wrh is an i?icomplete verb, the predi- 
 cate consists of the vei"b and whatever word is 
 necessary to com))lete the sense. 
 
 In the following Bcfttuncna, point out tlio simplo predicatoB. Ttjll 
 whether the verb is compleLo or iiicomplote; and If complete, toll 
 what is its complement. 
 
 1. The sun shines. 2. I like ilowers. 3. He 
 "wishes to go. 4. Napoleon was chosen emperor. 
 5. Tlie vessel sailed yesterday. G. Glass is trans- 
 parent. 
 
 Model of Analysis — Simple Subject and 
 Predicate. 
 
 1. The birds sing. 
 
 TliisJs a simple sentenco, booanse it contains only one subject 
 anri one ]iro(lic;ite. Tlie subject is the noun " birds!" The predi- 
 cate is " sing.'' 
 
 2. You are scholars. 
 
 Tliis is a simple sentence, bocauso it contains only one ubject 
 and one itrcdicate. Tlio 8ul)jcct is the pronoun " vou." The 
 predicate is "are scholar.^." " \ro " is an iucouipleto verb, and 
 •'scholars " is its :omplemeut. 
 
if tlie vorb 
 out, eitlier 
 dj>rcdicule 
 
 » 
 
 "sing 
 rb; that 
 
 {mericay 
 in!" Tlie 
 ic j)redU 
 oes not 
 I iiicoiii- 
 
 ilicfitc is 
 !te verb. 
 
 ic prcd U 
 word is 
 
 atoB. Tt;ll 
 aplcto, toll 
 
 3. Jle 
 
 mperor. 
 is traus- 
 
 AN4 LYSIS — EKLAUGKI) KUIUliCT. 80 
 
 3. To lie is disgraceful. 
 
 4. The fishofiiiaii brought a lobster. 
 
 TliLs If) a Himple Honteiioft, The subioct im " Hm r, \ .. 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 Analyze the following sentences : 
 
 B. 
 
 Write a simple sentence, containing a simj.le sub- 
 jectand predicate, on each of the following subjects. 
 When done, analyze the sentences :— 
 
 1. WiiKls. 
 
 2. Muniing. 
 
 3. Rain. 
 
 4. Snow. 
 
 5. Wliont 
 
 6. NiKht 
 
 ■ I 
 , I 
 
 
 and 
 
 subject 
 riie predi- 
 
 le subject 
 Ll." Tlio 
 verb, Jind 
 
 XXXVIII. ANALYSIS - ENLARGED SUB- 
 
 JECT. 
 
 1. A noun, the simple subject of a simple sen- 
 tcnce, may be enlarged by— 
 
 ^ L An adjective; as, hri<jht sides; sornehooU. 
 -. A noun in the posses.^ive case ; as, the av^vs 
 rays. 3. A noun in apposition; as, Alexander the 
 coppersmith. 4. An adjective phrase; as, men 
 of renovjn. 
 
% 
 
 LAN(5tJAGK LKSSONH. 
 
 2. Adjective |)lirast's an; ^crKTull)' iiitrcHluccd hj 
 prt'liositions or by ])artici|»Ii.'s. Tlius: 
 
 1. 'Mou of rrnnwn. [VhrnaomtmihicpiX hy a prrpo.^idtm.] 2. 
 The l);ill()itii,////r(; inilh (/(ts, (lo.-Uod ii[tiii tliu air. [riir;it«) intro- 
 duced by i\ iiarliiijilc] 
 
 Model of Analysis. 
 1. Heavy rai») falls. 
 
 Thfl 
 I- 
 
 'I'liis is n siiiipln sciitciife. Tli«f sini|>Ip siilijcct is " niiti " Tl 
 Hiil.jcot is enl.ii-e.i by tiii^ .-uljivtivo " lieuvy/' Tiic siiiii.lc nml 
 cato is " falls." It is not onliii-cd. 
 
 2. Jolm's book is torn. 
 
 Tins is !i simple soiitonre. Tlio simplo snlijcct is " Ixtdk," Tho 
 Piiliject is pnlai-c'(l by tiio noun " Jolm's,'' in tlic n<wscssivec;use. 
 J lie picdiwito is " is torn.'' 
 
 3. The study of history iiiiiiroves tlio mind. 
 
 Tliis is a simple sontonco. Tlie simple snbject is "ptndv " TIio 
 Piibjcct is enliir-c'd by tlm {idji't-tive "the." and bv the ndjootivo 
 pUruBe 01 history.*' The inedicato id " imi)rove8 the mind." 
 
 Exercise 36. . 
 
 A. 
 
 Analt/ze the following .siinnle sentences accordhif* 
 to the j)revious model : — 
 
 2. Great men are rare. 2. The liiiiitsinan's horn awnUe the 
 echoes. '6. Sir J.-rac Nowton, tlie f^icat pliih.Mjpjier, was an 
 Knnlifilmian. 4. Many friends of mv youth have perished 5 
 Iho army, having cros.sed the Uliine, entered Franco. (I F\- 
 Iiausted by fiitijjue, we hiy dowu. 7. The little bird's aon- is 
 sweet. " 
 
 B. 
 
 Ill the following sentences, enlarge the subject 
 by introducing ac^ectives^ or adjective j'/iruses^ or 
 both: — 
 
 MoDKr,.— Tlio bridge spans the river. Enlavf/rd— The great iron 
 bridge, built by a slulful engineer, spans the river. 
 
 1. The bridge sp.'ins tlie river. 2. The modiauic rej-aired the 
 engine. 3. Snakes infest the country. 4. Milton wrote " Para- 
 dise Lost.*' 5. Birds fly. 6. The fox stole the hens. 7. Jiees 
 gather houoy. 8. Music soothes, l). The (ire Itnrns. 10. The day 
 is ya.sstid. 11. liumbuldt id dead. IJ. Jjuukd yltioso me. 
 
ANALYSIS — EXLaRGKD PRKIUCAT 
 
 lucud hj 
 
 ftition.] 2. 
 ras«i iiitro- 
 
 91 
 
 lin." 'Thn 
 iiplc i)rt'(li- 
 
 ook." riio 
 Hsivo Ciise. 
 
 ul. 
 
 Kly." Tlio 
 ' ;viljoctive 
 mind." 
 
 cording 
 
 woke tlie 
 
 islii'il. 5. 
 (!. K\- 
 
 8 Btin.;; is 
 
 subject 
 aseSy or 
 
 jrcat iron 
 
 '.'liroil til 6 
 
 ,0 " Para- 
 
 7. Jioes 
 
 The day 
 
 KXXJX. ANALYSIS-ENLAUGKD TliKDI. 
 
 CATK. 
 
 1. A corii/^lete verb forming the prclicatu of a 
 acuLljuco iti <iulargu(l by— 
 
 1. An a«lvt'rl>. 
 
 2. An adverbial p.;rase. 
 
 ILLUSTllATIOXS. 
 
 1. The horse ran sici/ilf^. [Enlargement by au 
 adverb.] 
 
 2. Great men lived during t/ie sixteenth cm. 
 tury. 
 
 [Knlargcment by an adverbial phrase.] 
 
 2. A noun used as the complement of an incom- 
 riote verb may be enlarged in the same way as the 
 «imple subject. Thus :— . 
 
 1. The rain has injured the growinfj crops^. 
 •";;io\vin.r.'' mjuiod, Is enhu-ed by tlie adjootivo 
 
 . <-;J;/ ''''"' ^'Syi'lians embalmed the bodies of their 
 3. We i.assed a shepherd tending his sheep. 
 
 Model of Analysis. 
 
 1. The army advanced rapidly. 
 
 TUia \s ?\ simple scntouce. The subject is " the army "-not ei^- 
 
 ri. 
 
 •lii 
 
 n 
 
92 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 larged. The simple predicate is "advanced." Tlic predicate ig 
 eiilurged by tlio adverb " riipidly." 
 
 2. A Spirit liauuts llie year's laBt hours. 
 
 1 
 
 Tliis l8 a simple sentence. The subject is "a spirit" The 
 e)mi)le predicjito is "haunts the hours." The coniplenient of 
 liaunts' IS the noun "h •• - - ' 
 
 ' year's " and the adjective 
 
 liaunts' IS the noun "hours." It is enlarged by the nouD 
 "year's" and the ad iectivo "last," 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 A. 
 Analym the following simple sentences : 
 
 1. Rich men should give liberally. 2. The horn of the hnntor 
 IB hoard on the hill. 3. My dear mother will soon be here 4 
 The squirrol eyes askance the chestnuts browning. -6. iJcavon 
 from all creatures hides the book of fate. G. Souie birds of picv 
 having secured their victim, fly with it very swiftly to their nests' 
 
 7. The Blotli, in Its wild stato, passes its life on trees. 
 
 B 
 
 In the following sentences, enlarge the })retli('.alo 
 by means of adverbs, adverbial phrases, or both :— 
 
 MoPKL.— Wo go to swim. Enlanjcd—VfQ often go to swim in 
 the river. 
 
 1. The sun shines. 2. The moon shines. 3. They learn tl-f>ir 
 lessons. 4. The British soldl(!rs fought br:ivoly. 5. James wrote 
 o *^}^^-^ ^- ^* ^^ pleasant to watch the stars. 7. We took shelter 
 
 8. Iho firo burns. 1). IJees gather honey. 10. Uirds flv. 11 " 
 FushcB swim. 
 
 XL. REVIEW OF PUNCTUATING SIMPLE 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 1. The comma, period, point of interrogation, and 
 point of exclamation, are the only marks used ip 
 punctuating simple sentences, 
 
rcdicate is 
 
 irit." The 
 
 )lenient f)f 
 
 tlio nuuo 
 
 tiio linnt.or 
 i here. 4. 
 5. iJcfivPti 
 s of prey, 
 leir ue.sts 
 
 cod i cat o 
 botl) :— 
 
 oswiin in 
 
 sfirn tlv^ir 
 les wrote 
 k Hhcilter. , 
 fly. 11. 
 
 MPLE 
 
 on, and 
 used ip 
 
 REVIEW OF rUNOTUATINO SIMPLE .-^ENTENnEf?. f)S 
 
 2. Close a declarative sentence with the period, 
 an^ interrogative sentence with the interrogation 
 I)oint, and an exclamatory sentence with the point 
 of exclamation. 
 
 It is cold to-day. 
 Is it cold to-day ? 
 How cold it is to-day ! 
 
 The Comma. 
 
 Rule I.-Words of the same class in a se- 
 ries, taken individual or in pairs, arc sepa- 
 rated by commas. 
 
 The calm, cool, resoluU man presented a noble 
 example of dariiirr. 
 
 Russia exports xt^heat, tallow, flax, and hides. 
 no? to LlSmratel ^""^^''^'"^^^ ^^«^d« Joi»e^l by and or or are 
 
 Rule II._A phrase, unless very closely con- 
 nected with the word to which it belongs is 
 to be marked off by a comma. 
 
 1. In spite of all difficulties, they resolved to 
 make the attempt. 
 
 2. Tlio Indian monarch, stimned and bcioildered 
 saw his faithful subjects falling around him. 
 
 But in the sentence, " Our house i.s beautifully 
 situated about tln-ee miles from town," the phrase 
 about three miles from toim h too closely ioincd in 
 construction to be separated by a comma. 
 
 Rule Ill.-In a succession of phrases, each 
 phrase is to be marked off by a comma. 
 
 
J! 
 I j 
 
 94 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 At daybreak, tlic combiner] fleets were distinctly 
 seen from tlie Victory's head, formed in a dose line 
 of battle ahead, on the starboard tack, about twelve 
 tniles to leeward, and standing to the south. 
 
 Rule IV.— Adverbs like however, indeed, 
 TiiEKEFoiiE, etc., being equivalent to phrases, 
 are generally marked ofF by commas. 
 
 The story, however, was pronounced untrue. 
 No man, indeed, is always }in])])y. 
 
 Rule V.— Words or phrases in apposition 
 are marked off by commas. 
 
 James Watt, the improver of the steam engine, 
 was a native of Greenock. 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 Punctuate the following simple sentences : 
 
 1. lie was blessed with a sound understniidin-r mi intrenid 
 fpmt a benevolent heart 2. In our present ;uTvanc(' st' 
 It IS a discrace not to be able to write xond Kn-l sli 3 In 
 carrynig a barometer froni the level of the TIiiu-kn to tlio to 
 of St. Paul's Church in London the mercMiTv falls hal.uiS 
 inarkms an ascent of about live hundred' feet 4 I w sad 
 how dreary how desolate is this scene 5. Is it not nleas-int 
 in the niornin.o; to brush the dew upon the u pin ml lawn (f 
 Blilton the author of " hnadise T,ost " was blind 7 Tie 
 N,UM>al b(,■^.^^ .ixiven the fleet w. i.ulu.d i-nrhor 8. The croVir 
 Bells tea coHeo 8U.L;ar and spic^es '.». On the rich and the do- 
 
 2Smp" " ' ""^ ^"'"'"' *''" ^""^^^'"^ ^""^^-^d don wi h 
 
 XLI. REVIEW OF MAKING SIMPLE SEN- 
 TENCES. 
 
 1. In the previous lessons we have learned all that 
 goes to make up a simple senteucp, 
 
listinctly 
 
 close line 
 ut twelve 
 
 I. 
 
 INDEED, 
 
 )hrases, 
 
 ue. 
 
 josition 
 
 engine^ 
 
 n intrppid 
 iced 8t;ito 
 sh 3. hi 
 to tlie top 
 f .'in inch 
 Hiiw sJid 
 t plc'iisaiit 
 
 hnvu (i. 
 
 7. Tho 
 lio grower 
 ] the n\0' 
 own with 
 
 : SEN- 
 
 all tha^ 
 
 
 llEVlh V OE MAKING SIMPLE SEXTENCES. 05 
 
 2. A 8im]>le sentonoe contains but .1 single stnto 
 mi'nt, and therefore it can liave only one subject 
 and one ])redlcatc. 
 
 3. A sentence, however, may be simple, and still 
 <ontain a [^nvat inniiy AT->rds. This is i)ecause the 
 sinij.K' sul>;ect— the noun— ?nay be enlaru^ed by 
 words and ]>y phrases, and the simple predieato^ 
 the verb— may be eida ood in the same way. 
 
 Birds fly. ^ 
 
 Tliis is a siini.le seiitnice in its briefest form. 
 ^ Some birds of j)rey, having secured their vie- 
 tim, fly with it very swiftly to their nests. 
 
 This is still a simple sentence, but both subject and predi- 
 cate are enlar^^ci by words and plirases. 
 
 4. By way of practice and review, we shall now 
 have au exercise in buildiiig up simple sentences :^ 
 
 Separate State- 
 ments. . . 
 
 1. A balloon is a hag. 
 
 2. It i.s a thin ba^. 
 
 3. Tt is a Ii;;ht ba;;. 
 •{ 4. It is made of varnisliod silk. 
 
 5. It is generally shai)cd lilcc a -lobo. 
 
 (5. It is filled with a (luid li-htcr than 
 common air. 
 
 ( A J'.ALr.oox IS A thia ('J), i;,,ht (3) Hah. 
 
 \ juiiu U(//aer than cornnion air ((J). 
 
 " 1. Colvmb'is vt'tunira (,, Sjinin, 
 <5p.«nr-of^ c* * -• lie returned in HIKJ. 
 
 oeparate btate- o u i , 
 
 merit** i 1 • ",'*^",* !^""'^ months hi ex- 
 
 Combined 
 
 Combined 
 
 plormg the delightful regions. 
 4. These regions were now first tliro\vn 
 open to i'vuropean eyes. 
 
 In 1493, Columbus returnod to Si)nin 
 having spent some months in ex- 
 ploring the delightful regions now 
 nxat thrown opeu to Europeau eye* 
 
 i. 
 
 
 '11 
 
9C 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 6. Tlic reverse oisipU/iesis, orbuildingup dct.'Kjlied 
 statements into a simple sont(*ncc, is rlietorical artal. 
 yais — tliat is, writing in separate sentences tlie dif- 
 ferent statements implied in the original sentence 
 
 Thus — 
 
 GoMsmith the antlior of tlic " Deserted Vil- 
 lage," wrote with j.erfect eh-gaiice and beauty, 
 m a style of mellow tendei-ness and elaborate 
 simplicity. * 
 
 This scntoncc may bo resolved into the following stivtc- 
 uicijts : 
 
 1. Goldsmitli wrote with perfect elegance. 
 
 2. Goldsmith was the author of the " Deserted 
 Village." 
 
 3. He wrote with p^s-fect beauty. 
 
 4. He wrote in a style of mellow tenderness. 
 0, He wrote in a style of elaborate simplicity. 
 
 6. Pupils should learn, first of all, to express tlieir 
 thoughts in simple sentences. They often fall into 
 the habit of writing long, loose, ill-constructed sen- 
 tences. In order to form the habit of clear compo- 
 sition, remember the following : — 
 
 Uui.K. — Do not combine disconnected state- 
 ments by means of conjunctions or relative 
 pronouns ; but write short sentences, each 
 expressing a complete thought. And when- 
 ever you have written a very long, involved 
 sentence, break it up into two or more brief 
 and clear sentences. 
 
.vniK stiitc- 
 
 coxsthuction op nouxs. 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 97 
 
 Combine the following groups of statements so 
 that each group shall form a simple sentence :— 
 
 r...Mif.(f^f^r''f''f''-'",l-''''^' ^^'^ '"^ coiniuoivi.'il city. It w tl.e 
 cupiUiI of Lugland. It is situated ou the liivor Tluiiut'^. 
 
 It?; m.urof''illf'''i; 1 ^* I' *^'r".y ^^'^^'- '^ ''^ ■■' 1'1"« ^i'-'^^^^. 
 with lice? ' '"^ '" ''"" ^''^""^^ ^'^«^"'^»- ^' i« t'i"""t"a 
 
 3 C/iar^es X/7 , of Sweden was tJe/cnted. H« wjis dnfoatod -it 
 
 5. 77i« smxmlers came to the hermit's cell. Tliev oaino on tho 
 third day. Thoy came by the directiun of the peSnts 
 
 Cliango papers and write letters of critidani. Notice— 
 
 1. Is the sentence a sim])lo soiitoncr!? 2 Are therp inrr 
 nnstakes of spellins; ? .'{. Is the puMctu.ition correct ? 4 aZ 
 the phrases arranged iu the l,.,st possible n.a, ner ? f, Ifm ti S 
 sentence any other faults ? Can 'you improve t in a^y wly ? '^ 
 
 f* 
 
 XLII. COXSTRIJCTION OF NOIWS. 
 
 (1-) Nouns as Subjects. 
 
 1. The usual place of a noun as the aubject of a 
 
 sentence is before the verb ; as, A messenger was 
 
 sent. But in certain cases this order is invertetl— 
 
 1 When for tlie sake of emphasis, some other important 
 w<iid or phrase is put first; as, (a.) Never will a ,,r^ ) ,/ ^. 
 8ent to 80 dishonourable a pmceedin/^ ; I M iami 1^ IS 
 ^ustashe was writing to him ; (O^'h'/tn'e ^><SZ^^^Z 
 
 a3 JL" «®"*ences which report a dialogue, as, said lie renlied I 
 and the like ; as. Come, said mxijYmxa. make haste I ^ * 
 
I ' 
 
 98 
 
 LANCFAr.E LESSONS. 
 
 
 tlioro ?" "'*^"^-'''*'''^ ''^"'^ '" iuipf^nitivo sciitrnoca ; as, Arc you 
 
 ,a^yT^^'^ Bubje(^ts !n the followhig sentences, and show iu wha* 
 respect their lAiira la not tlio u.^u;il ouo. 
 
 1. Down fell tlie lioiise with a ^ivjit orasli. 2 Grcit i< 
 Diiina of tho Kplu^ifuis. o. Then n.so iiuni ;-ou to sky the'wilci 
 laicwell. 4. U h,it willbeconieof tho |iii(ir sliopi) ? " tliouclit 
 Klio. 5. Has au answer yet been lecLived ? G. May lie bo 
 
 (2.) Use of the FossoGsive Form. 
 William's sliiirc was five tliousand dollars. 
 Mary's sliarc was five tliousand dollars. 
 
 2. If we combine these sentences we sliall liave :— 
 William's and Mary's share was five thousand dol- 
 lars. But suppose we wish to say, not tliat each 
 separately had five tliousand dollai-s, but that the 
 share of both togotlier was five thousand dollars ; 
 we must then write, W illiam and Mary's share was 
 five thousand dollars. 
 
 Rule. — In a series Oi pos^jessive nouns, if 
 separate ownership is meant, write each noun 
 with the possessive sign ; if joint ownership, 
 use the sign with the last only. 
 
 Tell in which sentence joint owneiBliip Ih meant, and in whcli BPna- 
 r.at(j ov,'nen<hip. '* 
 
 1. Have you read any of Boaumcnt and Fletcher's plays ? 
 
 2. Have you read any of Sl!akespo.^re'8 and Jojison's plays ? 
 
 3. We ;idnure Scott's genius. 
 
 8. In the sentence, We admire Scott's genius, sup- 
 pose we wish to add to " Scott's " the explanatory 
 noun the novelist^ how shall we write the sentence ? 
 
CONSTlirOTlON Ol' NOUNS. 
 
 Wo adiuiro ScotCs the novclist'.i sening. 
 Wo admire ScoU's, the novelist, Keiiius. 
 Wo adiniio Scott, tlic novelist's, genius. 
 The last form is the correct one. 
 
 99 
 
 rp 
 
 UuLK.— When two possessives are in ap- 
 position, the last alone takes the possessive 
 sign. 
 
 XoTK.— In all f<uch mkoh. luivcvcr, it is niurh bctfor t<> Uu-n 
 the Bcntcnco tlius : We adnurc the K'enius of St the nu-lelilt 
 
 4. The following construction is bad English. 
 Jo/m going was unexijectcd. 
 TJic i-eason of him being tliere is unknown. 
 These sentences should be — 
 
 JohTbS going was unexpected. 
 The reason of his being there wns unknown. 
 (3) K'ouns as Objects. 
 
 5. Nouns arc generally placed after the verbs of 
 \vluch tlu^y are tlie c^ijects ; as, The mercliant has 
 built a house. Put if we wish to be em{)hatic, we 
 l.lace the objec,^ fij-st; as, My ri(jht tliere is none to 
 dispute=T]iere is none to dispute my right. 
 
 Name tho ohjocts !n the follo^viiig sontencos, and state what is Un- 
 as ual hi thejr iiOBitiou. 
 
 ■y VPr ^"^*''^*' ^ ^lave sold, but I will show your friend another. 
 Inm 1 r'Th^'T'*''" ^'1«" V^'^'^t i.iovolce ? 3. The baker he 
 
1^^ LAXGUAGi: LKSSOilH. 
 
 XLIll. now TO PAliSE NOUNS. 
 
 (1.) Noun as Subject. 
 
 The annij suffered (lefciit. 
 
 "Army" in a common noun, thii-d jx'rson, sini^u- 
 lar numlKM', neuU-r ^'endcr, and nominative casp, 
 subjet-t of the verb " suffered," because it is that of 
 wliieh the statement, " Buffered defeat," is made. 
 In the following soiitonucs, parso tbo noun-Htibjocts : 
 
 1 Kislios.'irc covered witli scale*. 2. A wK«e f<on ni.aketli a 
 Kind f. tiior. ... Imw crag to crag leapa tlic live tliuiider. 4 Thu 
 liorse la a qiiadrui>ed. 
 
 (2.) Wouns as Object, 
 (/olumbus discovered America. 
 
 "America" is a proper noun, tliird ])erson singu- 
 lar, neuter gender and objective case, object of the 
 verb " discovered." 
 
 In the following acntcncoe, imrsc the nonn-objoctB: 
 
 1. Tliecat followed tlie <:irl. 2. A man killed a tigress. ». The 
 lariucr sold the liortse. 4. Tlie people saw the giniit. 
 
 (3 ) Noun in Apposition. 
 
 Milton, tlie />oc^, was l)lind. 
 
 " Poet " is a common ivjun, third person singular, 
 masculine gender, and nominative case, in ap])o- 
 sition with " Milton," since it denotes the same 
 person. 
 
 In the following acntoncas, parse the nouns in apposition : 
 
 ^ 1. Milton, tlio Eiiglisli poet, wrote " Paradise Lost." 2. Tlie 
 Christians were porsooiited by Nero, tlie iiifanions ouiperor. 3 
 TUat usefa] animal, tliu oauiol, is louud in Asia and Africa. 
 
!sfS. 
 
 '11, sini^u- 
 ivo CISC, 
 
 H tll.'lt of 
 
 niiulc. 
 
 iD.'ikctli a 
 T. 4. The 
 
 m siiigu- 
 3t of the 
 
 »s. S. The 
 
 lingular, 
 in ap]>o- 
 ie same 
 
 n : 
 
 " 2. The 
 iperor. 3. 
 I'ica. 
 
 ' now To rAiisii nouns. 101 
 
 (4 ) Noun as Predicate Nominative. 
 C^ueuii Victoria is Bmjyrcfis of India. 
 " Kniprcss" is a common noun, third ].c"rson sin- 
 gular, feminine gender, in the predicate nominative 
 after " i«," and exi)lains tlie subject, " Queen Vic 
 toria." 
 
 l,..ai?e" '""°"''"" "'-•"♦^•"••^•^r'T^e the nouns i,. the prodl.-ato nom- 
 
 (5) Noun in Possessive Case. 
 The boi/s' .slates are broken. 
 
 " I5oys' " is a common noun, tliird j)erson plui-al, 
 masculine gender, possessive case, and limits tlie 
 noun " slates." 
 
 In the following sentences, par.c tbc nonns in the possessive ca«o ■ 
 
 ^^. cuddle 7 4 The heroVh.n'uJdlh/l.^r'Jir J^^ 
 
 (6) Noun used in a Phrase. 
 
 The man tciththe white coat c-.uae fro?n London. 
 
 " Coat" is a common noun, third person siiKnd'ir 
 neuter gender, and objective case ; is joined b'y the 
 preposition " with " to the noun " man : " '« with tlie 
 white coat " is an adjective phrase. 
 
 "London ' is a proper noun, third ])erson sincm. 
 lar, ncuto^ gender, objective case, and is joined \w 
 the proposition " from " to "came:" "from Lou- 
 don " is an adverbial phrase. 
 
 In the following sentences, parse tlie nouns uso.l in phiasns • 
 
Ir I 
 
 ! I 
 
 m 
 
 LANGUAGE . LESSONS. 
 
 h' 
 
 (7) Noun as Nominative Independent 
 Our leather, who art in heaven. 
 
 "Father "is a proper noun, second person sin* 
 gular, masculine gender, and nominative of ad- 
 dress. 
 
 The 7n{st having arisen, a beautiful prospece 
 was disclosed. 
 
 "Mist" is a common noun, third person singrt- 
 lar, neuter gender, and nominative absolute, u^ed 
 indei)endently in the phrase "the mist havin^ 
 arisen." ° 
 
 In tho following Hontoiicos, parse thonouiiH iiulcpondent : 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 Parse all the nmms in the following sentences :— 
 
 hpl",/^!"^'"' ^^^^}^,'^ *^'e apples. 2. Tli« sonrro of tho Niln hag 
 been discovered by no one yet. 3. Coal-fioUls are the remi nJ 
 
 a patnot. 6. Death, where is thy sting ? 
 
 XLIV. CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (1) The Article. 
 1. When two or more nouns or adjectives refer 
 to the same thing, the article is j.refixed to the first 
 only ; but if they refer to different things, the ar. 
 tide should be repeated with each. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Tlie governor and commander-in-chief ha? 
 arrived (that is, one person). 
 
COXSTRirOTION OF ADJUPTIVES. 
 
 103 
 
 2. The governor and the comrnander-in-chiLf 
 have arrived (that is, two persons). 
 
 3. lie lives in a long and narrow street (one 
 street). 
 
 4. The rich and the poor have a coninion inter- 
 est (two classes). 
 
 SLOW tlie upplioation of Uiis rule in tho following sonteiicca :— 
 
 f ^ t '^Ia °^ ""^ *''^ ^''^'^^^ ^^^ ^''^ domestic animals cliiofly uaod 
 
 I ^«.^"i^'l",''." Franklin, tho philoBoplicr and statOHman, lived 
 in riiilii(i«l|)!iia. 
 
 3. Tlie tljioe brotlicrs were under a largo and Hproading tree. 
 
 4. I i)as80d a man and a boy on my way to the village. 
 0. Bishoi) IJiitlor is a butter reasoner than writer, 
 
 6. I saw a red, wliito, aud blue Hag. Here i.s a white and a red 
 flatf. 
 
 (2.) Comparison. 
 2. The comparative is used when two objects are 
 compared ; the superlative, when more than two. 
 Hence — 
 
 RiTLE.— Never use the superlative when but 
 
 two objects are compared. 
 
 The Euphrates and the Tigris are rivers of Asia : 
 
 of these, the Euphrates is the larger, and the Ti«i-ris 
 the more rapid. ® 
 
 It woiild be wring to say, The Eui)lirate.« is the laruest : Tho 
 ligns the mosO'<i/>u/. 
 
 Why is this sentence incorrect — This is the 
 best house of the two ? 
 
 (3.) Position of Adjectives. 
 3. An adjective generally precedes its noun ; as* 
 A wise man ; A great and wise man. But it may 
 follow it for emphasis or in poetic construction ; as, 
 A man wise nnd good: A man he was to all thf 
 country dear. 
 
 1 !> 
 
- ■.'■' 
 
 I- 
 
 ^04 LANOUACE LESSONS. 
 
 (4.) Adjectives for Adverbs, 
 
 4. A few V. -hs containing the meaning of the 
 verb ^>e can take a predicate a.ljective instead of an 
 adverb. 
 
 1. Tlie rose smells .strcrf. 
 
 2. The velvet feels nmuofh. 
 
 5. It would be incorrect to say, The rose jonollf; 
 sivcetlij; The velvet feels mooihli/. What these 
 sentences mean is, that the rose is sweet to the 
 scent, and that the velvet is smooth to the touch. 
 
 N0TK.--rTi parHiu-, notic-tLut then; aic a few verbs like 
 J- '^"'•;"- •■<■ J^<"'I<. 5. Ik'cnme. 
 
 t.l^;^.l '*'\-'T'^I''"^V'1^ '"• "' then., an.! that t.icse 
 vrrhs taku a |Mu.lu',itc' a.l.f.aue, vvheiva.s all (.rdiimry vorhs 
 taKi.' advt'i'lw, •' 
 
 Would you say, " Miss Smith looks henutifuWi ? ' 
 [Adverb.] Why noti Would you say, the lemon 
 tastes soiirlij ? Why not ? 
 
 (6.) Parsing of Adjectives. 
 
 C. An adjective is parsed by saying that it de- 
 scribes or limits the noun [naming it]. 
 
 7. A predicate adjective is parse/^ by saying tha-t 
 it is the predicate adjective, and dosciiue^ the sub- 
 ject of the verb. 
 
 Model.— What an excellent thing is knowledge. 
 , " Excellent " is an adjective, positive degree, and 
 df scribes the noun "thing." 
 
 The way was long. 
 
 *' Long " if^. aa adjective, positive degree, after the 
 verb " was," and predicated of the subject, " way." 
 
MIMrrsED AIM/V'TIVKS. Kjf, 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 A. 
 
 Parse tl.e adjectioe.^ In Lho following sontcnees - 
 
 tho wi.ul was .old; the MiiMstiel whh .1 .-.nan ^.i rV/'?^ ""^'• 
 transparent. <;. Tlio Holdu i,.,.i- 1> . V \V;."* "• >vat('r n 
 
 wluui I was a littlo cir ) Thi. ^^n 1 ''''.V'"* r'"derful story 
 The ostrich is the liigest [biJij' r^bil^i! '''''' '"'""' '''''''■ '^^ 
 
 B. 
 
 Correct tlie errors in adjectives ;— 
 
 1- Whiclurt tlm oldest of thfise two l)ovfl ? o ti.« a 1 1 
 jfreenly. 3. The do-' smolN dis-iL'rooMi.iL^ i i- ••.• ® ^^'^'^ ' "^^ 
 est of my two dauehtors n T h ;A^ * ^ ''""'"^ ''■* ^''^ ••ri^; /.t- 
 flings 8wcct "'"'^"^*^'^"' ^- H"-^ •iike tistOH Hweotly. o. M^iry 
 
 1i 
 
 XLV. JVriSUSED ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (1) These for This. 
 1. The adjective this must be usecTonly with 8inrr„. 
 lar nouns; these witli plural nouns. This rule is 
 1» «,/!" ^'fi^^^f f -ons as "^/.... sort of peo- 
 pie, "^/.o..kmd of horses." We must say, " ' /«. 
 sort of people," « that kind of horses." 
 
 (2.) Them for These- 
 
 2 The personal pronoun Mem is frequently used 
 ror the adjective those; as "Mm thin<?s," mean- 
 m-;^... things." The word « them "^i^ the 2 
 jeoMonn of the pronoun « they ; » hence it cannot 
 be used as an adjective. We might as well say 
 
 " nis book." * ' 
 
106 
 
 
 w 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 (3.) This here. 
 
 3. The use of this here, and of thai there, instead 
 of this and that, is incoi-iect. Tlie word this ex. 
 presses all tJiat can be denoted by « tliis liere," and 
 that expresses all that can be denoted by " that 
 there." 
 
 (4.) High-sounding Adjectives. 
 
 4. The pupils may write on slates or on paper the 
 following adjectives : — 
 
 Awful. 
 
 Frightful. 
 
 Horrible. 
 
 Splendid. 
 
 Tremendous. 
 
 Dreadful. 
 
 6. These are all good English adjectives. It is 
 perfectly proper to use them when we use thera 
 rightly. But these words, and some others like 
 them, are very often abused by careless children 
 and grown people. 
 
 6. "Awful" means inspiring awe. We may say 
 of a thnnder-storm that it was awful, and this would 
 be perfectly proper, beca;ise a thunder-storm is awe- 
 itispiring. 
 
 7. Would it be proper to speak of an " awful lot 
 of fun?" or of an 'Umfulhi hard lessor?" Cer- 
 tamly not. There is nothing awe-ins])iring .'n eitlier 
 of these things. The person who uses such ex])res. 
 sions means merely that tiir^ro was a great deal of 
 fun, and that the ksson was very hard. 
 
 8. Rule.— Never use an adjective larger in 
 meaning than the idea you wish to express. 
 
e, instead 
 3 this ex- 
 ere," and 
 by "that 
 
 paper the 
 
 1. The heat was perfectly /ny,//,,/, 
 ^_^2. men we got to the hotel we ha.l a /<..nW. 
 
 IS. 
 
 !.S. It 18 
 
 ISO tliern 
 lers like 
 children 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 Correct the errors in tI,o following .ontcneea .•_ 
 
 motlier wa, so,,k. belter 'smH,?'' '',•''','' '""•■'■"'™- '•■■••'...l- 
 wa "',:?,, " "'^ "•■'"■ » «™ "e- io,, W 'S"c.r° ■';■',■"''"« '!" 
 Himpler to take your plau ""' "'^'" ^''^^es. He finds it nloie : 
 
 may say 
 is would 
 n is awe- 
 
 v)fid lot 
 
 " Cer- 
 
 !ii either 
 
 ex])res- 
 
 deal of 
 
 •ger in 
 spress. 
 
 XI.VI. LESSOxN ON THE AGUEKMENT OF' 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 1- In grainmnrs, the rule for verbs is that the^ 
 mus agree with their suhjeets i„ nun,!.: t ^ 
 
 ^tMo«, the verb m the present tense must take an ... 
 ^ 2. But we must be very careful with n fo,^ ,.(•- 
 m-egular forn.s, re„>embcrino. that /,«„*,.; ]2 
 an,l ,. are used with subjects of the third , orson 
 
 ::;S:::"''''""^''^'''^''--''--tha.i':"t;:; 
 
108 
 
 LAKGUAOfi LESSONS. 
 
 3. We know tliat such exj.ressions as The horses 
 runs, the boys has gone to school, the dog loalk, are 
 wrong, and wliy they are wrong. But there a.-o 
 otlier forms of expression that are not so simple as 
 these. 
 
 5. The first difficulty in using tlicse verbs correct- 
 ly occurs when the subjects have qualifying phrases, 
 
 ILLUSTUATIONS. 
 
 1. The union oi two great rivers j^roduces t'le 
 La Plata. 
 
 , The veil) is " produces; " the aiibioct is " union." " Union " 
 18 111 the sni-iilar number, niu] hence " j.roducos " is riclitlv in the 
 sin-ular number, to jisroe with it. The word " rivcPs,"' in the 
 phniHe of two -re.-it rivers," can have notliin- to do with the 
 
 form ^i t?iZ'^'' ''k'''"'"' " T'?'** " •'" "•"«'• ^^it'' -^ preposition to 
 
 fubTecToffife vl?b'''*''' ""' ''''''' '' ''"" ^'"^ ^""^^^^ <^-^ ^'- 
 
 2. The condition of the roads are horrible. 
 
 . The real subject of the verb is the noun " condition," which is 
 
 ntej""- V'?^ ''^'^' ^I'T^.^""?' ^^^o"''! ^« '■•''-^''0 condition is. TI.p 
 phrase of the roads," bcm;; a mere qralifier, has no control 
 over the form of the verb. k'huoi 
 
 6. Rule.— When a subject has qualifying 
 words or phrases, select the real subject, and 
 make the form of the verb agree with that, 
 without reference to the qualifying words or 
 phrases. 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 A. 
 
 What word is the real subject in these sentences? 
 
 t The direction of the rnonntalns vrn? towards tlio south. 2. 
 The store, with all tlie goods in it, was destroyed. 3. None of 
 our children likes tomatoes 4. Six month.s' interest seems to be 
 clue. 5. The mechanism of clocks and watches were then un- 
 known (wronj,'). A variety of circuiiistauces are to be taken into 
 account (wron^;). 
 
Vfiiins witn two stjftjjccts. 109 
 
 B. 
 
 ^yhnt ,>]irnse in each of tho pvecvdhvr .ouiomos 
 might lead a careless speaker into making a mistake 
 in the form of the verb ? 
 
 Model.— Six months' interest scenis to be duo. 
 
 Tlie verb is "seems," in the singular number. It 
 agrees witli its subject, "interest." The word 
 "months'" has no control over the form of tho 
 vei-l, because that word is in the j.ossessivc case, 
 and limits " interest." 
 
 XLTII. VERBS WITH TWO SUBJECTS. 
 
 (I) Two Nouns joined by "and" 
 1. Sometimes the subject of a verb consists of 
 two or more singular nouns. Thus : 
 
 1. The horse, the ox, and the dec- are quadru- 
 peds. 
 
 2. Grace and Gertrude have recited their les- 
 sons. 
 
 3. Gold and silver are precious metals. 
 
 2. In the first sentence the subjectconsists of three 
 singular nouns, connected by " and." What are 
 they? The subject of the second sentence is two 
 singular nouns, connected by "and." Wljat are 
 they? The subject of the third sentence is two sin- 
 giilar nouns. What are they? 
 
 3. Rule.— Two or more singular subjects 
 ricaning different persons or things, and join- 
 ed by Axn, take a verb in the plural. 
 
 4. Exceptions.-There are some apparent ex- 
 ceptious to the rule. 
 
■;/ tl 
 
 110 
 
 t.A VGUAGB LfiBSONB. 
 
 II-LUSTBATIOXS. 
 
 -1. A gentleman and scholar lives licre. 
 
 2. Why is dust and ashes proud? 
 
 3. Tlie boy, and not the dogs, is to blame. 
 
 ^^l^ ^:^^.J^^^^ -Hf,;:;;;;- two 
 
 ^Sn^7^:}^f'1 «""'/^'^«ve snbjoc'a^^d leave {hSlSS 
 rett form of the verb to be understood with the iiet^ativo subject. 
 
 4. Every tree and every shrub is in bloom. 
 
 The rule ill such cases is tliat wlien two or more ein^ular snh- 
 30ct8 joined by r,„(? are doscrilierl by the adjectives eS a'c/roi 
 no, the verb takes the singuhir form. •'''^"ves earn, etc? y, or 
 
 (2.) Two Nouns joined by ''or" or "nor." 
 
 5. RuLE.—Two or more singular subjects 
 joined by ok or nok require a verb in the sin- 
 gular. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIOXS. 
 
 1. John or his l)rot]ier has the book. 
 
 Tlip two siiifrnl.nj .subjocls nre ".Tohn" and "his brother" 
 Tliey are so]).'ir;itod by "or," and lionco, as we really niulie tlie 
 Btatenicnt of only om, the verb " lias" is singular. 
 
 2. Either Anne or Jane tell a falsehood. 
 
 Yon obsen'e that the verb " tell " ia the plural form Rnt thf^ 
 Is wronj^ ; the statement is made of but one, and hence the verb 
 should bo singular— ^€^;,s a falsehood. 
 
 6. Sometimes one of the subjects separated by or 
 
10 is buth a 
 
 ON " TIIT^IJE IS " AND « TIIETJE ARE." Hi 
 
 or nor is singulur and l ],o oUior plurnl. In tl.is caso 
 the verb IS made to agree with its nearest subject, 
 rims: He or his friends arcuo blani'. 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 Correct the errors in the form of the verbs in the 
 •tollowing sentences :-^ 
 
 1. Pines and firs ^rows in Xcrway and Sweden, o Mv fri.M.,1 
 and compan on are doid "i ti,„ . , , '^"" - ^i3 'nond 
 
 ::^i.:;iZr::;:;;n;or;:^^^^ 
 
 XLVIII. LESSON CWTTTERE JS " AND 
 " TIIEUE ARK." 
 
 1. Shall M^e s:iy « there «5 or « tLere a^-e ? " Tliis 
 dei>ends entirely on what cow,, arter /. or'^re. 
 
 S'^^''«r«ai'plos(*uthetiee. 
 
 T{ „V 'f^rei.s-watfir in flin milk 
 
 .5. I hero IS a po.ilc of potatoes in the pantrv 
 
 5. rheie /. a pleasure in ti.e pathloss wood. 
 
 2. Let us now see Mhy u-e say ^s or are iu each 
 case. 
 
 1. There ar^ apples on the^tree-beeause the 
 phiral noun "apples," coming after "are," is its 
 subject. 
 
 ^ 2 There is water in the milk-because the sub, 
 ject IS the singular noim •'- water." 
 
112 
 
 ■':■ I 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 ir 
 
 3. There is a peck of potatoes in the pantry— 
 because the subject is tlio noun "peck," wliich is 
 singular; it matters not (hat we speak of a peck 
 "of potatoes," because " of potatoes " is a mere 
 pi rase, and can have no inlhience on the number of 
 the subject. 
 
 4. There are many flowers born to blush unseen 
 —because the subject is the plural noun " flowers." 
 
 5. There is a ])leasure in the pathless woods— 
 because the subject is the noun " i)Ieasure " 
 whicli is in the singular number. * 
 
 3. Thus we clearly see that whether we shall say 
 ihore is or there c^e depends entirely on the num. 
 ber ot the real subject. 
 
 4. Now, what is the little word " there? " If we 
 say, « The book is ikere^^ the word " there " is an 
 adverb. But " there," in the sentences given abov^ 
 l^5 not an adverb. Thus— 
 
 There came to the beach a poor exile of Erin. 
 This is tlie same as if we should say, 
 
 A poor exile of Erin came to the beach. 
 
 * 
 In all such cases the word there serves to introduce 
 the statement, while the re^/ subject comes after the 
 verl). It may be called an introductory partide. 
 5. The same rule that applies to " there is " and 
 there ar.» applies to all verbs used in the same 
 way with there. The verb must agi-ee with the real 
 Bubjcct, which will be found after the verb. 
 
SYNTAX OF PRONOUXS. 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 Correct the following verbs :— 
 
 113 
 
 XLIX. SYNTAX OF PKONOUNS. 
 (1.) Agreement of Pronouns. 
 
 1. Pronouns stand for nouns. Hence in usirm 
 J)ronoun8 we must be very careful that we use tJie 
 right pronouns, and also that we use them correctly. 
 
 2. RuLE.—A pronoun must be of the same 
 number as the noun it is meant to represent. 
 as, IhG man is sick : he has a fever ; » « The men 
 are foolish, because they waste tfieir money. 
 
 3. Rule -When two or more singular nouns 
 are jomed by a7id, the pronoun used to repre- 
 sent them must be plural; but whenseparat- 
 
 IhuV'Wh.alcs and elephants are mammals: they 
 suckle their young." " When he sees a dog or a 
 cat, he chases it." ^ 
 
 4. RuLE.-Collective nouns require singular 
 or plural pronouns according as they convey 
 the Idea of unity or plurality. Thus, " The 
 
i 
 
 M 
 It 
 
 i s 1 
 
 114 
 
 LANGUAGE LliSSOJVS. 
 
 Dominion ParliMnicnt [i.loii of ,n,i(y] M.ccfsin Ko,- 
 ru.iry, and //; will a.lj.mrn in JM.-iy.'' "Tho poopTo 
 [idea of plurality] liavc disagreed, and tl.oy will 
 continue to qnaiTol.'' 
 
 *** When ono or moro nouns nro. Drrcp.lid l.v fl,f» ir,.,..iu 
 Correct fho mistukcs In the iironouim : 
 
 better Anybody ni their senses would have known 
 
 (2.) Pronouns as Subjects. 
 
 5. Rule.— When a rr-jnoun is used as the 
 subject of a verb, it must take the subject- 
 form, that is, the nominative case. 
 
 6. W"e should say, 
 ■/go to town; 
 
 And not, 
 
 He takes a walk. 
 
 Me go to town ; 
 Jlim takes a walk. 
 
 7. Now, it is not ;it all likdv tliat any person 
 would say, " J/d go to town ; » " JJim takes a walk ; " 
 but careless people are constantly committing mis- 
 takes that are nearly as bad. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Richard is taller than me. 
 
 2. Mary is older than him. 
 
 3. Who wants a kite ? Me. 
 
SYNTAX OP PRON-OUNS. H5 
 
 stood. Let us write tlie scntonees out in full :_ 
 
 . 1. R'^'Jiardistallcrthanmeam. 
 2. Miiry is older than A^V^^. ig. 
 
 ^. Who wants a kite ? J/d wants a kite 
 
 S 
 
 ^,^?r " '''"'' '^'' ^^'^Wect-fonn, l,ut the object-form * 
 
 toim. Sui.plying the suhjcct-fonn, we l.ave the 
 sentences in the right shape : 
 
 1. Richard is older than /. 
 
 2. Mary is taller than /le. ' 
 4. Who wants a kite ? I. 
 
 (3.) Pronouns as Objects. 
 
 8. RuLE.-A pronoun used as the object of 
 a verb or with a preposition, must ta :e the 
 objeet.form, that is, the objective case. 
 
 0. This means tlmt we should say, 
 
 I do not know ivhom I love best. 
 -And not, 
 
 I do not know who I love best 
 
 Here " whom » is the object of the verb " love '> 
 and hence .t has, quite properly, the object-form' ; 
 ln>t who IS the subject-form, which is incorrect. 
 
 10. A pronoun governed by a preposition must 
 a ways be m the objective form. Thus : To wAom 
 
116 
 
 LAJfGUAGK MWSONS. 
 
 SI J 
 
 l)res8ion u 
 
 Ki^ 
 
 11. The following incorrect form of cxd 
 very often heurd :—. 
 
 BeLvveon you and I. 
 
 This should be " Between you and me- The prepo- 
 . B.tion between requires the object-form of tlie L^ 
 noun ; hence me, and not 7, should be enii^loyed." 
 
 Correct the mistakes in Uio proiiouns : 
 
 No Hucl. girl as her shiuKo /.nSo ec O^^'fet t n f ''['f^''- '*• 
 b0Htu.4j. (J. Who did you set tlTbook from ? ^ ''"^ ' "''^ °"* 
 
 (4.) Common Mistakes in Pronouns. 
 12. TJie pupils may write the :N»:io wing sentences ; 
 
 1. liichard ho went to school. 
 
 2. Eva slie forgot her lunch-basket. 
 
 3. The dog it ran down the street. 
 
 You may make these sentences good English bv 
 loav.ng out the « he " in the first sentence, the " she '' 
 111 the second, and the " it" in the third. 
 
 cause you have the subjec Riclmrd tLZ]^? """f^'^^-^^'^ry, •'bo- 
 fore. be'. Richard weut^S^HeKr.^^^^^ 
 
 13. DutECTiox.-Do not use a personal pro- 
 noun as the subject of a verb when the verb 
 has already a noun for its subject. 
 
 (5.) Politeness in Pronouns. 
 
 J^.'J^'''^ ^— ^" the position of singular pronouns 
 Of different j)ersoqs, the second (you) |>rooe<les th^ 
 
SY.VTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 117 
 
 • • 
 
 •ession ut 
 
 ic prepo- 
 tlio jjro. 
 loyc'J. 
 
 Kco, slater 
 Jttcrs. 4, 
 d 1 go out 
 
 tcnces : 
 
 lish by 
 
 "she" 
 
 5 pubjoot 
 ary, bo- 
 :1, tlieic- 
 )1." 
 
 1 pro- 
 J verb 
 
 nouns 
 es th9 
 
 others (he, she, it, I; r and the thir i (he. she it) 
 precedes the first (I) ; a*., You anJ he will -o. ' m 
 and I will go. 
 
 OnsiciivATiON.— Horo " lio " and "von " «' T" o..^ u ^ •> 
 would not be correct. ^ "' ^ *"** ''®' 
 
 15. A noun has the same place as a third personal 
 pronoun ; as, lie says he saw either ray cousin or 
 me. 
 
 16. Rule Il.-With the phiral pronouns, we has 
 tlie first place, you the second, and they the third ; 
 as, We and t/iei/ start to-raorrow. 
 
 tiS -.SSKSi,;:sStir L?r =- rii;;;^^ p-- 
 
 (6). It ig I. 
 
 17. Pupils may write the following sentences :— 
 
 1. It is I. 
 
 2. Who is the general ? I am he. 
 
 3. We thouglit it was she. 
 
 verb''?i8 "°°The"nrnn!!. *^?. «"VP*^>'*-.'«^'"' ^"d comefl after the 
 Sues aS;rthI^lnr"aT'' The nr^^ the subject-form, and 
 
118 
 
 LANOUAGR LKSSOJ^S. 
 
 1'^- In tliose sentences it would be iiioorrent to 
 Siiy. ^ 
 
 1. It is 7)16. 
 
 2. Wlio is the general ? I am /iim. 
 
 3. We thouoht it was her. 
 
 'ifti' • nio ill tlio ol)i,>,t-forin U'' .v Ji i i ., ' . '"'"• »»^ 
 
 ferrcd t. '.' ' ' ^^^^ t'K'ii.ulit sA,. was tlio porson lo- 
 
 19. No^v write the two following sentences :- 
 
 1. Thoy tliought that ii was ./. 
 
 2. Thoy thought them to be ua. 
 
 Tn tlio lirMt sentence "I *' ia in fi,« ., i • ^ . 
 vorb " wius" is j.ieoedcd bv i7 , n. », ^^'''^J^'^f-/"'''". ''ocin.so the 
 incorrect to Hay/'' Thev timn l/t f ^'^''^''^S';^^ '^ ^^"^'I'l I'" 
 sentence, tbo p mnonn '' nn ''^iHS "S/i n?- TV '" ''''^ '^^''^"•'<' 
 correct. Why is this? T},« 11. • ol>.|C'ct-forni, and this is 
 
 I>recododby''^the,n:'' LJtj^eHrollolw.!''^^ '"^ ^'«^'^ " ^« " - 
 
 20. RuzK.-The subject-form of the pronouns 
 
 before the verb be. The object-form of the 
 pronouns comes after the verb be when an 
 object comes before the verb bk. 
 . (7.) Parsing Pronouns. 
 
 21. Pronouns have the same inflections as nouns, 
 anil are parsed in the same way as nouns 
 
 I) ' A r 
 
 '\ f 
 
 L. SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. • 
 (!•) Position of Adverbs. 
 1. RiTLE.-Adverbs should be so placed in a 
 sentence as to qualify the word intended, 
 
1 correct to 
 
 SYNTAX OP ADVEnnS. 
 nj.USTIJATION. 
 
 119 
 
 1. He nunc to so,, riio wJ,/ oucv. 
 - ^'<'o;//y (.nine to see nie oiiee. 
 2. Those tu'o sontcnoos Ii-m-m .mcf. .. j 
 
 ""•••niin,,. „s ,1,0 ...h . " ; ,;' f ; ;>-^'"^"f 
 
 '....■.lif.v »».,,. „,. ,.,„„„. Th,. ';i;:st „;:.,':;', ,:;- .^:, •; 
 
 Plncc . " ciiimgo 01 ini-iuiliig i„ii,|o l.j oad, ,|,i(ii„g of 
 
 1. Only ho Jii„urnc(l for |,is bi-otlior. 
 -. \\ may p,-„l,,,l,ly ^j,, ,,),or« to-morrow. 
 ai,oiogy ''"'°'™'^ i"..ne<liau.ly to nu.ke an 
 
 (3-) Mis-iseofAdjectives for Adverbs. 
 vprhQ Q rp, ^^!^^^^ use adjectives as ad- 
 IJa ^""^ speaks .^/.^mcY/y-not dis. 
 
 IB there anything wronj? fn thoso sontoncee ? 
 1. Pauline Avritea elegant. 
 -5. Joseph walks slow 
 
 'n., I- ,V7 ponding part of the verb /;e TJm,« 
 il.e holds look^rcen, might he, TIk- fk'w; ..'':' 
 
 He looks co/f7; ) , ( tTp in.i 77/ ° 
 The air felt ^^n ; [ ^^"t, 1 1[^ ^o'cs c./.% on us. 
 
 -' ^ Mlelolt the insult -^•efc7%. 
 
 \v' ^l'^ ^^" ^'''^' S^^® l«oks /f/ie, or /fne/^, ? 
 
120 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 ■41 ! 
 
 ij " >:■< 
 
 , -i'M 
 
 nil- 
 
 (3.) Double Negatives. 
 7. RuLE.-In English, two negatives are 
 equal to an affirmative. Hence, n'ever intrL 
 duce two negatives when you intend to make 
 a negative statement. 
 
 n-LUSTIlATIOX. 
 
 I have not done nothing. 
 This means I have done something; ^v^hereas 
 wh^j^^was meant was, I have not done anything, or, 
 "1 have done nothing." . ^' ' 
 
 Ck)rroct these fl«ntenceB : 
 
 1. I don't like geography nohow. 2. I did not 
 
 work? tTj 'r i^'- '• ^^" ^^"^ ^^^^- -^ ^« - 
 
 woik/ 4. He did not say nothin^r. 
 Parsfng Adverbs. 
 8. Adverbs are i^^r^e^ by telling the derrree if 
 inflected, and by saying, They limi^t the verTad- 
 jective, or other adverb [naming itj. 
 
 Exercise 46. 
 Parse the adverbs in the following sentences :~ 
 
 ^^'^-^^yln^7.^^^^^ '"-t quickly. 2. 
 
 very well. 4. When are S Sn ^J'° (•''f I'-f^, «"«wered 
 lesson better to-naorrow. 'i\i?^^k\J-^Z!yXt tl^T 
 
 LI. ON COMroUND SENTENCES. 
 
 The rain descended, and the floods came. 
 1. Here two statements, "The rain descended," 
 the floods came," are joined into one sentence by 
 
 the conjunction « and," but neither qualifies the 
 
 other. 
 
stives are 
 ver intro- 
 i to make 
 
 ►* whereas 
 ything^ or, 
 
 I did not 
 not do no 
 
 degree, if 
 ^erb, ad- 
 
 ices : — 
 
 uickly. 2. 
 
 I answered 
 
 know our 
 
 too well. 
 
 ES. 
 
 le. 
 
 ended," 
 once by 
 fies the 
 
 OK COWroUKb SENTENCES. ^1 
 
 2. Def,xition.-A sentence consisting ^f two 
 or more statements joined, so that one does 
 not qualify another, is called a compound 
 sentence. 
 
 tl.?a?c1vre?'TlVe fi?s^^^^^^^^^ "^ej^in descended, 
 
 it would tell U'/ien the Toodf Jro .^T, 1,^^^^^ ««^"""^' 
 
 the floods came," is not a eomS»d hT\ '''^''•'"" ^e-'^ceuded, 
 which we shaU speak herenftS ' * complex sentence, of 
 
 3. Tlie different statements of a compound sen- 
 tence are called its members. 
 
 4 The members of a compound sentence are 
 jomed by one of tl,e co-ordinate conjunctions. The 
 principal co-onlinate conjunctions are and, but, or 
 hence, either— or, neither—nor. ' 
 
 Hentence. 'l^^^^^-^'m^^'^^^JlT^^,^' ^ -'"i'-"'^ 
 or a7eLtv7fre'£"'' "'^ '°""^'=""" ''^'^ '« « relative pronoun 
 
 iremher, and so make a co, ZK^Senci^'^'SnT'''^^ "" 'V'°«*P«» 
 tive pronoun or adverb oonZ ni t),l 1„ * ^".* ^T''**" ^''e rel.i- 
 comimnd. contains the sense of and, the sentence is 
 
 th?c'oS.leursrii'a™y°f *^^ '°"«^"8 compound sontcnceB, and name 
 «ncccedB well. 4. Go tTSe ant thn.^ d I'Rent boy ; hence he 
 
I 
 
 I! '- '* 
 
 122 
 
 LANGUAGE LUSSOXS. 
 
 fo&Tg: '"'"''"^ "'"'"''«' ^ "'"'^^ con,i,ound8o,.to„coHO»tof th6 
 
 l.^e clo„ds nro dispersed, n„d _. 2. To orr is Innnan ; 
 
 ,.', ' •^- ^^'^^c-'"'" our lo».so„s carefully; therefore . 4 
 
 tither you never asked mo to do it, or . 
 
 5. Contracted Compound Sentences —Tt 
 often ha].])eiis tli.it different rncnibers of a (.onipcMMHl 
 sentence l.ave the same subject, or ti.e same predi- 
 cate, or tlje same cnlarirements of either or of both. 
 WJkcn tliese connnon elements are omitted in one of 
 the members, the sentence is a contracted compound 
 sentence. 
 
 II : 
 
 ll 
 
 II.LUSTIIATIOXS. 
 
 1. The birds saw the little pool, and tlic birds 
 came there to drink. 
 
 Contracted tlnis : The birds saw the little poob 
 and came tlicre to drink. 
 
 Here the subject "birds," being common to both members 
 i8 omitted from the second, and the sontcncc is contracted. 
 
 2. Either a knave must have done this, or a fool 
 must have done this. 
 
 Contracted : Either a knave or a fool must have 
 done this. 
 
 Here the predicMo ••must have done this," being common to 
 both members, is omitted from the first. 
 
 3. Cold produces ice, and heat dissolves ice. 
 Contracted: Cold produces, and heat dissolves 
 
 ice. 
 
 Tlio object "ice," being 
 from the first member of the 
 
 common to both members, Ib omitted 
 contracted form. 
 
iK-'Ohi out of th« 
 
 rr is Ijiiman ; 
 ufore . 4. 
 
 iinces. — It 
 compound 
 line prodi- 
 i)r of bolli. 
 [1 in one of 
 conij)onn(J 
 
 tlie birds 
 littlo ]>ool> 
 
 li meinbere, 
 itrncted. 
 
 i, or .1 fool 
 iiust liavo 
 common to 
 
 es ice. 
 dissolves 
 
 I, is omitted 
 
 r 
 
 ANALYSIS OP COMrOUND SENTEXCES. 123 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 A. 
 
 Contract the following compound se?i4e>ices, and 
 state the nature of the contraction :— 
 
 4. Canada exports wheat; Eiighu.d imports wl.eat. 
 
 4. Tlio yoimrr soldier joined his re"-imonf on,i H.n .,„ 
 dier was present at the battle. ^®»""cnt, and the young gol. 
 
 B. 
 
 Contract tlie following four sentences into one 
 compoimd sentence of nine words :— 
 
 1. Frogs live on land. 2. Frcs lire in witor i c . .. 
 land. 4. Seala live iu water '^^ ^" ^''""'^ "^^ <>» 
 
 LII. ANALYSIS OF COMPOUxVD SFX 
 
 TEXCES. 
 
 In analyzing a compound sentence, it is only nec- 
 cs.sary to mention of what statements (two or more) 
 It Ks made up, to tell what conjunction connects the 
 slMtements, and then proceed to analyse the sepa- 
 rate statements in precisely the same manner in 
 whicii we analyzed simple sentences. 
 
 Model of Analysis. 
 
 The Second Punic War lasted for sixteen years, 
 and It ended in 202 B.C. 
 
 TlMS Is a cou.ppuMd seMto„cp. It is composed of the two state- 
 
124 
 
 I! ' • 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 Su;cd'i.^w"jf£'""^^;^^^^ '••^«*«^ f^r «-t««n years," "It 
 
 olSat'^^^oujiaion ''S "'^ connected by the co- 
 
 teo^!';oS••*^¥^s]Ul''^^'^.^^^^^^ Piinic War Lasted for six- 
 predicate is enlarged by the adveJbial pEe ''Tu 202 K" 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 Analyze the following compound se?ite7ices :— 
 
 wo/nth '%'TSnrLn"'^' ''i'^,"'*' «l*y ^'"^^ "'« centre of its 
 wc.wm. /, 1 no man recovered from the bite, bnt tlie dn.^ dipH 
 
 All fh.''""^,"'"'* '?•''"' '^ ^'^ i^o'-y- «r our cause will be rSd 4" 
 Change papers, and write oUore of criticism. 
 
 w 4 
 
 LIII. MAKING JC'MPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 1. Wo have had considerable practice inbreakin.^ 
 lip long, loose compound sentences into a series of 
 simple sentences, each containing but one statement. 
 
 2. It is very clumsy to combine in one sentence a 
 series of statements loosely connected by ands and 
 If 8, buts and ors; and if the pujul has profited by 
 
 the exercises given, he will have learned to avoid so 
 faulty a way of writing and speaking. 
 
 3. But, at the same time, it is very important to 
 be able to compose good compound sentences. |f 9 
 
rears," "It 
 u by the CO- 
 
 ted for six- 
 bject is ou- 
 i "I'unic." 
 Jularyed by 
 
 ^lie subject 
 ded." The 
 B.C." 
 
 -es : — 
 
 ntro of its 
 ! dog died, 
 [•iiined. 4. 
 re] merely 
 Luisl'ortune 
 
 >reakiii«r 
 lerics of 
 tenient. 
 
 itence a 
 ids and 
 Itcd by 
 ivoid 80 
 
 tant to 
 
 MAKING c^OMPOUXD SENTENCES. 126 
 
 letter or a composition consists of nothing but little 
 -mpe sentences it will bo too much broken u^ 
 The following will illustrate this :~ 
 
 The Lion. 
 
 f- Tlio lion then rou c 1 ','?!;" ''i^!'''"''^'^'' /• ^^''-^'''tsotH in. 
 bosuis to prowl. 7. lu o" ^T^Mlm \. '"■• "• ^'"^ '*"" tlien 
 
 victim with his powerful ci'uvs!' ''"" ^'-''^^« ''''^ 
 
 4. Here are nine simple sentences. The effect is 
 not agreeable when you read the piece aloud. The 
 sentences are too much of the same length. Then 
 the words "the lion" occur too frequently, he 
 writer apparently forgetting that thl arcfsuch 
 ^aings as pronouns, and that prououns stand for 
 
 5 Sentences I and 2 Aomid bo brougl.i togctl.or 
 luto one contracted compound sentence" thus : 
 t The lion Is round In Africa anj in Asia. 
 
 6. Sentences 3, 4, 5, and 6 n>ay be blended into 
 one compound sentence, thus : 
 
 7. Sentence 7 may remain unchanged in f„n„_a 
 short Simple sentence between t»-o so.ncwhat Ion. 
 compouiid seiitenees. The pronoun Ae should, how" 
 ever, be substituted for " the lion," thug : 
 
 8. In general, he walls In ambusb. 
 
 8. Sentences 8 and 9 sho.ild be connected into 
 one compound sentence, thus : 
 
126 
 
 LAXGUAGE T-KSSONS. 
 
 0. The composition now rends as follows, and is 
 certainly much better than it was in its orio-inal 
 form : ° 
 
 U I 
 
 thS'^m>"miVVi"'"r -'"^ f:^"«^^-i"S exorcise, niako auv clian-cs 
 t h.'it ii re needed to bmi- the pieces into -uud sl^-nie Tho mnrn 
 thoM^dit you sue to these exercise., the better \vm be the re! 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 Coml)ine the simple sentences in each of the fol- 
 lowing j)aragm|,l,s into compound sentences where 
 It is necessary, so as to produce a continuous narra. 
 tive : 
 
 A. 
 
 II > I 
 
 B. 
 
 Tlie whale is the largest aninuU known to us. The wh-ile in 
 souiotinies met with from .«i\-tv to seventy leet in iVmrM. u • 
 nn inhab tant of the soas within the Arc '?Circ e It ff^n "in! Ill' 
 itan of tlie seas within the Ant.a.;tic Circle WhVle-fishh^^;^^ 
 earned on to a considerable extent from seveml co ntder TliS 
 aminal is valuable for ts oil. Wo obtain o'l fr niT nM^« -i • 
 called blubber. /Das .aniuKvl is vuluaNe\.;iso^ ) r'i .' whi^ebonf 
 1 he whalebone IS obtained from its mouth. There it -cfM? a 
 Sr. "" * '' ^""'^ *^'' ''^'''^'' ^^^'""^ ^^ Vtmiuing* ihe sea? 
 
 c. 
 
 A hungry dog had picked up a bone. He Inirricd awav with 
 Jt. He camo to a nice clear brook. Yuh br -•- - - • 
 
 plank. The sun sJione brij,'htly. 
 
 ,_,- - -;<iol< was crossed by a 
 I he (togs shadow was made 
 
COMPLt^X SkNTKNCtSS, 
 
 127 
 
 rs, and is 
 3 original 
 
 the day lio 
 rousos liim- 
 
 lio ivuits ill 
 victim, iiiul 
 
 uy cliai)f,'os 
 
 Tlio more 
 
 il be the re- 
 
 ' the fol- 
 35 Avliero 
 us iiarror 
 
 
 D. 
 
 AV.IS re,narl<ahle for con.Iosco ,s his s /him^^ 
 
 m,Ml. The mnlctoor oouhl no ^iw o, ' vh' ; l h ''' t, '" l" 
 
 oaated mm,, to him. Many had fol-me5ro,.pSed him " """ 
 
 A the red- 
 
 Tliehead 
 
 and upper 
 
 whale is 
 fth. It is 
 an inhab- 
 •fi.shiiitj is 
 ies. this 
 Tlie oil is 
 halebone, 
 acts as a 
 : tlie sea> 
 
 way with 
 sed by a 
 .'IS made 
 
 The polar bear is of a white colour. It fs fomul ;„ ♦i.n * *• 
 
 hixh it dori\ OS security in w'lll- ,. oJor m,/ ' ^ ' '" *''^ ''"•'"■"*» 
 erablo value. lextuio. it is of cousid- 
 
 LIV, COMPLEX SENTENCES. 
 I shall be ready wlien you call me. 
 He Avill learn il yon teach him. 
 
 1. The fiivst sentence consists of tu-o statemeats, 
 of which the second, « when you call me," qualiaes 
 
128 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 ii 
 
 ;5i * 
 
 I i 
 
 ,1 
 
 tlie i)reclicntc of tlic oilier, " I shall bo ready." The 
 BcconcI Fcnlcnce is of two parts, of wiiich one, "if 
 you tcacli Iilm," is a sn])positbn qtialifying tlic other, 
 or principal statement, " he will learn." 
 
 DErmmoN.— A sentence consisting of two 
 or more statements joined together, so that 
 one statement is principal and the other sub- 
 ordinate, is called a coaiplex sextexce. 
 
 3. The principal part is caUm] the 2)rmcipal mem- 
 her; the subordinate i)art is called a clause, or nub- 
 ordinate sentence. 
 
 4. Clairses are gcneially joined to principal mem- 
 bers : — 
 
 (1.) By subordinate conjunctions, such as that 
 and if. 
 
 (2.) By the relative pronouns—tf'/io, which, 
 that, what. 
 
 (3.) By relative adverbs—wj/ic/?, lohere, why. 
 5. There are three kinds of clauses: 
 The noun clause, or noun sentence. 
 The adjectice clause, or adjective sentence. 
 The adverbial clause, or adverbial sentence. 
 
 (1) The Noun Clause. 
 
 G. Deftnition.— A clause which is the sub- 
 ject or the object of the principal member is 
 called a noun clause; as "Do you remember 
 ijohat I aaid/^^ 
 
Kly." The 
 ih one, "if 
 I Clie other, 
 
 ig of two 
 r, so that 
 ther sub- 
 IE. 
 
 ipal niem- 
 se, or iful/- 
 
 ipal nicm- 
 
 cli as t/iat 
 
 0, which, 
 
 e, lohy. 
 
 eutcnce. 
 sentence. 
 
 he sub- 
 mber is 
 ^member 
 
 COMPLEX SENTK>f(RS. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 129 
 
 A. 
 
 Point out the noun clauses in the followini? sen, 
 tences, and tell whether they are subjects or objeets : 
 
 T^'/tt wo get leather fZn s d s i !-„ uVf'^'''" ''^ '''"'» ^• 
 Wliere Homer was born i\s not kiiLn " . ^^ '"''"'■>' °"«- •*• 
 troo would be blo^n down "' ^'"^'"^ ^"^ ^''""^'''t the 
 
 B. 
 
 Supply noun clauses m the following sentences: 
 
 1. Do yon not reraoinber • 
 3. How could flho hear 
 
 ? 2. MoHt people know 
 4. I oo|)Io used to think 
 
 5. IJo aHkcd one of the nuusons'to tell l?im 
 
 7. Dep,nition.-A clause that qualifies a 
 
 biids^^^/m^ /.,;, on other animals are called birds of 
 pi ey. 
 
 Exercise 51. 
 
 A. 
 
 Point out the acTJcctioe clauses, and 'tell what 
 nouns they qualify ; " ^^^^ 
 
 Th'o cr5w7thaf a*^!.;lL?e^'°ro^:;!fl'/°", -"' '"- to hear. 2 
 b:ick. 3. I'^nnkliu w1 o wS^i „^^^^^^^ I'or now stood 
 
 Boston. 4. WogetsilkfromaoHtP.nShri^''''/'-''''' '^''« '"^"» i'» 
 
 J^l'- ,?.;rhe ho"«e wheS Sha1Ss';'^t"JU^,;r''?;l,"'« ^''^ 
 p. -f^Jnong ino foreigners who renMiroH fr^ivV/r,' "t''' titiinds. 
 the brethren of Joteph 7 %?e Scots wh^^^'S^'^ ^"y,««r" ^vere 
 ravaged the country with unsnarinc. f„;./^*l''iV^"*'^^'^ to York, 
 mal that is attentively exaiSed a Si^s^' H.f ' ^^'% "'"'"*«'^t ^^^' 
 The heart of Robert BriSwhich vn« nL '''''''1'^'^ wonders. «j. 
 was consigned to the care of DoSal ^''''^''''^ ^^ » s"ver case 
 
I I 
 
 i:U) 
 
 LAvouAOK r.nssoyg. 
 
 B. 
 
 Supply axTJective clauses. 
 
 1.1 will sliow you tlio book . 2. Tlip hu]es of oxen and 
 
 Phcei, ar. ,uU\ to the tanner . 'X Tho n.ilk and the bn?J^ 
 
 -— -— lire obtained from the cnv. 4. That is the honso 
 
 0. Arc llieso tjie acoiiiri ? 
 
 iji 
 
 
 ':i 
 
 !■! 
 
 i I 
 
 (3.) The Adverbial Clause. 
 
 Dkfixition.— A clause that qualifits the verb 
 of the principal member is called an adver- 
 bial clause; as, "The daisy sliuts Iw.r eye w/ie?i 
 , the dew begins to faUP 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 A. 
 
 Point out the adverbial dauses, 
 
 1. Wo shall sail when the moon rises. 2. Tho s-ionr-cane is 
 prpHsed l)et\voen heavy rollers tifl all the jiiioe runs (Tut. ;? As 
 tJiev drew near the nest, the e;io;le daslied by. 4. If we stndv 
 we shall iniiirove. 5. Yon will nut succeed unless you pei-sevcre! 
 
 B. 
 
 Supply adverbial clavses. 
 
 1. We ph.all be fflad to .^ee yon . 2. Come 3 I 
 
 will tell yon a secret . 4. CliarJea fiad been five miniite> on 
 
 the ice . 5. Wo shall learn a <;reat inany t!)ing8 
 
 C, 
 
 Write a complex sentence on each of the following 
 words : 
 
 1. Ants. 
 
 2. Music. 
 
 3. TliebnfTalo. 
 
 4. Columbus. 
 
 6. Scholars, 
 ti. Geography. 
 
 Change papers, and write letters of crlticlBra. 
 
AXALVSJS 01' COMl'LEX SENTi^NCfiS, l31 
 
 ( oxen and 
 
 1 the biitt^i 
 
 MKSO 
 
 he verb 
 I adver- 
 ^yc when 
 
 LV. ANALYSIS OF COxMPLKX SKNTKNCKS. 
 
 In annly/Ing complex .cntonces, proooc,! .,s follows- 
 I. Toll which is the principal inemher. 
 II. Tell Avhich is the clause. 
 HI. Tell what connective joins th« clause with 
 the ])finei])al nieniher. 
 
 IV. Then analyse the principal member and tho 
 cliiuse, as in the case of simple sentences. 
 
 :ar-cane is 
 lit. ;?. Ah 
 we stiuly, 
 porsevcre. 
 
 — . 3. I 
 
 liniiteii ou 
 
 llowin" 
 
 l.ars. 
 raphy. 
 
 Model Of Aalysis 
 Exam ph. 
 
 Whe). the war closed the Commander-in-cliief 
 retired to his home. 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 Analyze the following complex scnlcnccs! 
 
132 
 
 LAN(a'A<jli M:;sso\.4. 
 
 W 
 
 LVI. liXPANDING AND CONTIiACTJNG 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 1. rjcMc— A simple sentence is transformed 
 into a compound sentence by changing a word 
 or phrase into a clause. A complex sentence 
 is transformed into a compound sentence by 
 changing a clause into a principal member. 
 
 (1.) Simple to Complex. 
 
 At the conclusion of the battle, the coinniniider 
 began to count his loss. 
 
 What kind of a sentence is this? A Rinij)lc sen- 
 tence, because it contains but one subject, " tlie 
 commander," and one predicate, " began to count 
 his loss." 
 
 Wliat is the expression "at the conclusion of the 
 battle?" It is an adverbial phrase, qualifying the 
 verb "bcijau." 
 
 2. Xow we may, by a lil'Ie chango, m;ikn this .i 
 com])k'x soMt( ce. Iiisloa<l of saying " at tlie v.ow 
 elusion of the battle," we may say, w/ien the battle 
 teas concluded^ and the simple'sentcnce will then bo 
 changed into the com])lex sentence: When the 
 battle was concluded, the commander began to count 
 Lis loss. 
 
 3. Let us now t.ake another eiam])lo : Mary being 
 ill, wo had to go to the j)icnic without her. 
 
 This ip :i simple sciitonce. Hut c']iaii,:::c t}-<» plirfise " Jlary 1 
 
 ( !,,'iir' into tlie iliuiso as Man/ ivan ill, and we have tlic 
 
 »o- 
 
 I'OIll- 
 
 L 
 
 ex scuteucc, As Mai-y was ill, wc had to go to the iiicnic witliout 
 
 ler. 
 
ACTING 
 
 sformed 
 g a word 
 sentence 
 tcncc by 
 mber. 
 
 iimandcr 
 
 iil)lc scn- 
 ct, « the 
 to count 
 
 'in of tlie 
 ying the 
 
 en 111 is .1 
 
 tlie (5011* 
 
 he battle 
 
 tlllMl bo 
 
 hen the 
 to count 
 
 vy boiii 
 
 Mary Ito- 
 ! tlio com- 
 ic witliout 
 
 KXl'ANDING AM) CONTliArTtNO SUNTKNCKS. 133 
 
 4. Take a tliinl example : Tlic discoveries of Liv- 
 ingstonc, one of the greatest travellers of modern 
 times, have taught us much about the interior of 
 Africa. 
 
 2.) Complex to CompouTid. 
 
 6. We have changed a number of simple seh- 
 tences mto coraj)lex sentences. No\v u-e shall trans- 
 form these complex sentences into compound sen- 
 tences. 
 
 Wlicn the battle was concluded, the commander 
 began to count h' iss. 
 
 ♦J J''f Z®''^^"'? ^^' ' '•"'8 is a complex sentence is hecaimp nno «r 
 
 6. If we make this qualifying statome^t a;>nnct- 
 p«/onr, we shall have a compound sentence, t'lus ; 
 The b..itle was concluded, and the commander be- 
 gan to count his loss. 
 
 7. The second complex sentence is : As Mary was 
 ill, we had to go to the picnic without her. 
 
 This is transformed into a compound sontoncp ns follow^ • 
 Mary ^vus ,11, and heuce we had to go to the picnic wiUiouthor ' 
 
 8. The third complex sentence is: The discov- 
 cries of Livingstone, who was one of the gi-entest 
 travellers of modern times, have taught us mwAx 
 about the interior of Africa. 
 
 This is transformed into a compound sontence. .t^ follon-o • 
 LmnKstone was one of the jjroatost travoJlersrVf Ller hnes* 
 Kricll!" ^''*=°^''"''* ^""^^ ^A^^.vM^x^ nuich about the inJcriorof 
 
184 
 
 tA^^GtJAGl: LESSOXg. 
 
 JluLE.—A compound sentence is contracted 
 into a complex one by changing a principal 
 member into a clause. A complex sentence 
 IS contracted into a simple one by changing 
 a clause into a phrase. 
 
 (3.) Compound to Complex. 
 
 10. Take the followiug compound sentence; The 
 sc£ spent its fury, and then it became cahn. 
 
 KtE?- ^^ ^^'t •^'^■« "'e«e statements ? Does cither qualify 
 
 11. TJiis sentence may be transformed into a com- 
 I)lex sentence in tlie following Avays : 
 
 o So f^n'/'^'''" '' ^'i"^ ^I\*^"* '*« ^"'•y. ^Jccame calm. 
 ?' Wl?.^^^,^''''*'"",'' ^^i'''^ '''^'^" ^* had spent its fnry 
 4 \\'htu ?fVT ^'""iT'}^ 't8 fury, it became calm. 
 4. A\ hen It had spent its fury, the sea became calm. 
 
 Eiich of the.se sentences is a complex sentence • l)pcnii«n nf ita 
 
 P 1 statement in each ? AVhat is the quruifyin- cause in ilm 
 first? the second? the third? the fourth ? " "'° 
 
 (4.) Complex to Simple. 
 
 12. In order to condense the complex sentence, 
 " When the sea had spent its fury, it became calm," 
 into a simple sentence, we must cliange the clause, 
 "when the sea had s])ent its fury," into a phrase] 
 namely, « the sea liaving sj)ent its fury." We now 
 have the followhig forms of the simple sentence :— 
 
 1. The sea having- spei;t its fury, became c.nlm. 
 
 2. Ihe sea became calm, liaving spent itd fmv. 
 
 3. Uavins spent its fury, the sea becamo calm. 
 
 
ntracted 
 principal 
 sentence 
 ;hanging 
 
 ice: The 
 
 i>rinri|)a. 
 Iior qualify 
 
 O a com- 
 
 mie of its 
 ;lie j)rliici- 
 ise ill tlie 
 
 iiiteiice, 
 calm," 
 clause^ 
 )/irase : 
 Tc now 
 II cc :— . 
 
 EXPANDING AND CONTRACTING SENTENCES. 135 
 
 » Exercise 54. 
 
 A. 
 
 Expand the foUowiDg smiple sentences into com. 
 plex sentences : — 
 
 ej^deiit to all. 6. The maunor of hia escape is a profomid mys- 
 
 B. 
 
 Expand the following complex sentences into 
 compound: — 
 
 1. As tlie wind was fair, the vessel Dut to sea 2 Thn ^p/^*- 
 
 C. 
 
 Contract the foUowing compound sentences into 
 complex sentences, and then, if possible, into simple 
 sentences . — 
 
 t Jo\!!?® "ffht infantry joined the main body, and the enemv rn 
 
 D. 
 
 Contract the following complex sentences into 
 simple sentences : — 
 
 1. Soc-mtes proved that virtue is its own rowird o un,n„ 
 mornuis began to dawn, our ship struck on a sunken reef^^" 
 tlie rock-boiind i?oa-K 3 it nnv h« aooJu i S reel, near 
 
 is round [the rotundity of ' 4^t is\1 irSirbeli ^^^d^il^^^^^^^ 
 soul IS immortal 5. The rain has been fallin-' ever since tl« «.m^ 
 rose. 6. A tree is known by the fruit that it beSrs 7 A . S »'■" 
 annually over/lowed by the Nile, it a very rich countrv T^'^l 
 man vvLo is virtuous will be happy. ''*"^J' "«" '-^"""y- «• The 
 

 ti 
 
 i ■ 11( 
 
 186 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES IN COMro. 
 
 SITION. 
 
 A. — Letter-wbiting. 
 
 Superscriptions and Subscriptions. 
 
 Tlie following superscriptions, subscriptions, etc., of letters are 
 desi-ned to show what is now regarded as the inos an nrovcd i 
 .ransement and style of these parts : and 116^05 serve '^^^ 
 models, according to circumstances. ^ ^ ® ^ 
 
 Some of the most common forms of address are Sir. Dear Sir 
 My dear Sir, Respected Sir, Sirs, Dear Sirs Gentlemen I n^dipJ' 
 Madmn, Dear Madam, etc.;' Dear Susan, My dSSd, My de'r 
 Mr Smi h My dear Mrs. Smith, Mothe^, Brother, etc accordfn' 
 
 thenarnif '"'il^' ?^ T^f.'^^ 1"*''"^^^' «r affection exSg between 
 the parties. Note tliat the form of address Madam, Dear Madam 
 18 as applicable to unmarried as to 7narried ladies. ^'^""""t. 
 
 vZIi^f"'?^""^"^" '^^y ^^ Y''"i'3. Yours truly. Most truly yours 
 Very truly vours, Yours rosi.eetfullv, Hcspcctf.illy SinJS 
 yours, Your friend. Your obedient serx^nt, etc ; SaSon- 
 ately Youraffectionate iriend. Your lovin- brother, SretefoT- 
 lowed by the name of the writer. The closing will vary witi! the 
 varying relations of the parties. " ^ *'^® 
 
 (1.) Heading or date. 
 
 Toronto, Ont., Feb. 3, 1873. 
 (2.) Address.* 
 
 Mr. James F. Hammond, 
 
 421 Broadway, N. Y. 
 (3.) Introduction. 
 Lear Sir,— (4.) Body. 
 
 In reply to your letter of the 10th inst., I heg 
 have to say that I most cheerfully jccede to your very 
 reasonable request, etc. 
 
 (5.) Superscription. 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 Henry H. Adams. 
 
 • The address inside the letter should be identical witli thn 
 iuper8criptiou upon the envelope, and may be put either before 
 the^introauction or at the bottom of the letter, on the iJftTuud 
 
EXEHCISKS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 137 
 
 JOMrO- 
 
 Afeasrs. NicTioh tf ffall, 
 
 82 Bromfield St., Boston. 
 Bear Sirs: 
 
 ^ Pearl St., yeu> York, 
 July 27, ur-i. 
 
 etters are 
 
 )rovcd ar- 
 
 sorve as 
 
 Dear Sir, 
 ), Ladies. 
 I, My dear 
 according 
 r betweeu 
 r Madam, 
 
 Tarn, gentlemen, 
 
 Ilespectfully yours, 
 
 Bavid B. Smith, J.\ 
 
 To the Hon. the Minister of Education '^ 
 
 Toronto, Ont. 
 Sir,— 
 
 ly yours, 
 Sincerely 
 iffection- 
 , etc., fol- 
 with the 
 
 , 3, 1873. 
 
 / have the honor to be, Sir, 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 • Edward Evant. 
 
 Dear Madam,-^ 
 
 (1) 
 
 ., / bag 
 ir very 
 
 ms. 
 
 ith the 
 
 before 
 
 Ct-huud 
 
 ^u» Amelia D. Cook, 
 
 18 Sideau Street, Ottatea. 
 
 (2.) ~ 
 
 Af.V dear Friend,— 
 
 Sincerely yours, 
 
 Henry Vamum. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 Isaac H. Hamlin. 
 
 My dear Sister,— 
 
 Your affectionate brother, 
 
 William. 
 
(' 
 
 138 
 
 Mn dear Mr. Brown, - 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 \A^ 
 
 
 My dear Sir, — 
 
 Most truly yours, 
 
 Alexander Knos. 
 
 Vours, a.<t ever, 
 
 Horace Mann. 
 
 LETTEB OP INTRODCrCTION. 
 
 London, Sept. 25, 1873. 
 Dear Sir,~h gives me pleasure to introduce to yon my 
 much-esteemed fi'iend, Mr. W. P. Johnmn. Any aftenfions 
 that you may show him will be gratefully acknowledqed and 
 cheerfully reciprocated by 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 A. li. drover. 
 Hon. Wm. Graham, 
 
 27 State Street, 
 
 Albany, N. Y. 
 
 Note.— It is not customary to seal a letter of iutroduction. 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 1. Write a letter to your teacher narrating your experiencea 
 during your last vacation. '»p«rit.ucei 
 
 2. Write and tell your duties at hcIiooI— your amiiseiuents or 
 recreations-your walks, books, thoughts or observations. 
 
 3. Write and toll about a visit to a museum or public «ardon- 
 tlie objects of interest, etc. ^ o^ruou 
 
 4. Write abo.it the days of ynnr childliood— your earliost roool- 
 
 K!l"A~^"''•^^^^''^'•'' «t «chool-your impre^ssious-your id^ 
 about that period of your life. •'*'■' jrvui mtaw 
 
 5. Write and tell about an evening party— the number— thp 
 •musements-the music-the pleasures of social intercow^ 
 
KisctLLANMbs ^xkncm. a, coiirosrriox, 139 
 
 B. — NARRATlviSi 
 
 Example.— "7;i w„,-^^ ^-^ strenr;(/i» 
 
 hiH^betdrirorrSS Sffo^'V ^'--^^'"^ "--n, to 
 The young men were stroni. Ti?^ ^''^'Vi ^ ^""dl« of armwH 
 .Ho took it in Jiis t.,rn. iTo S,tioJ ,7 'n"'* "'!? ^^'^'^'^ tJ'« 2«"d c 
 fi'-'^'ly. He tl.on tinned tmvi!l'S."''''''^«"-Vl>i-olveeacl) arrow 
 •'.Mark the e/Tect of u S, n, ?'. n '''V'' "« ^'-^^d to 1 07 
 -ncble. Divided, you will b^e SS,;?;-^^'. ^"" ^'"' ^« '- 
 
 One wny of combining :-_ 
 
 nud'onKS i,:;;;,^!^ ;:Sak^„S' ^'^^"^^ ^"^ -- to Ms bedside 
 though strong, bcinl m^ ,Jp n H '^ of arrou-.s. TJie yomi-S 
 turn, tn.ticd it and eas h n^^^^ ^'«t*^"'< the bln.dlo in hk 
 
 ^'iSlili^Sli^eS?^^- ^^"^ ^ i-inJ!li^; lSv?3^:yi;'S 
 
 Another mode of combininrr: 
 
 £^^us.'i;a--s.™„S'^.._. 
 
i I 
 
 M 
 
 I i 
 
 .1. 
 
 11 
 
 **0 LAKTGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 Combine in the same way the following paragraph 
 
 Tea. 
 
 c£'%ttanfve'Sr'eeu" itSjwsTljn.^'T'^ pw., chlofl, in 
 to*ixfeet. It bears prettv wl.ff« flnJ^ the height of from fot.r 
 wild roses. In ChKS\are ,^^^^^^^ 'i'J'O flowers resemble 
 
 erally of small extent Th,?y a "riLuterlhV?^^ ^'"^"^ """^ ««»■ 
 They are sitnr.ted on the slnnifm «n„ r" ."'®, "Pper valleyn. 
 places the soil is light/ It is S" I fc. i''^- ''"> '» "'«^« 
 •re raised from so?d. They are ireneruS int'"''!^.^" '^^'« '^''-^''^^ 
 years iu the ground. A cron r,f ffo, n -'^ /vl'owed to remain three 
 
 i-lie leaves afe'caref ally 'A^ibrtlS *"'^*'" ''^^'^ "'«'"• 
 
 C— WniTINr FKOM IIeads. 
 
 A more advanced exercise in writing is to mve 
 he pupil merely the heads of a composition, and 
 then require him to fill it out. 
 
 The Cow. 
 
 -^^^inJ^^^rn£T!^'^^^^^^ ; "rtlcles 
 
 tance of milk ; tKe calf ; use of [te skin ' ° ^"^^ ' *'"t'°'^- 
 
 its^rht'o^ro^tSe moTtts^;tait,r/f '"^^ '"-^ °-^"'- 
 
 the purposes to which tT^S^K 'of it"!? i^^^^^ ' '''"^ 
 
 .ire almost innumerable T\^t m ft'^fa 11 • ^^ body are applied 
 tain covering for our 'eet th a Wf '^i'"," "^^ ^"^^ scarce y ob- 
 
 almost Xlfy made from the sk^^^^ S^''^^ ^'^'-^^ being 
 
 into an endless varietJ^nfninr' ^^^ '^' ^^esides, manufactured 
 
 lime, its K?ervTto*^aLToSf/^ i'tHoln^'''"^- ^^^'^ ^'^^ 
 combs, knife-haudles boxes driniH,,',, ;1^ "^ are converted into 
 liseful articles ; and its bones are en ?nv ff ''' '^K^'f ' ^"'^ «t^er 
 and ornamental purposes ThrSXfri'^'''" ^^™«^^*'° 
 most valuable of^.n\mal prSuc£^ ^^ .?f /,?'„:;.^'; «"« ^^ «'« 
 wholesome and nourishing article of dSt^'lli^^^T'''-^ "^«^ «« f^ 
 butter and cheese are made Thfi.v,,!«; y^*^''" ^'■^'." '""'^ that 
 calf ; its skin is made "So fine b fob, «n^ "f *''® ^^''^.'^ ««"ed a 
 material for binding book^ ^ ^^""^ ^"^ '^''^^«' parchiuent, and 
 
iragraph 
 
 » chiefly in 
 from four 
 "8 resemble 
 se are geii- 
 er valleys. 
 In these 
 Tlie pl.aiits 
 innin three 
 rom them. 
 
 to give 
 on, and 
 
 ; nrtlclos 
 I ; impor- 
 
 Ht nflefnl. 
 lan ; and 
 * applied 
 rcely ob- 
 !ar being 
 ifnctured 
 xed with 
 rted into 
 id other 
 loraestic 
 e of the 
 tiso H8 a 
 iiillc that 
 called a 
 eut, and 
 
 MlSCfiLLANKOUS ^XEttClSlSS l.V COMrosiTlOX. 141 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 Bo the 8«me with the following paragraphs.:-. 
 Description of Printing. 
 
 »-^ha?tre^\7i?H''aJ'e^^^^^^^ «««'"g "P of the type, 
 
 tl.e words are^Sim ,7tc; i)l«?tt^,^^ i" the Ji^ 
 
 •ifi hand a com/,.,^v,?-S f«5mt ?8 ?hi; ?f ""TT^' ''^'^h in 
 into pagos-the page is fixed L, ipn f 5!"**"® ^T"". '^'"^ "'«de 
 process of iukiitf-the rnllnr h L ^'^*^'"® ^^"6*^ » chase- 
 
 tlio pressure stim,pi„cr tS .wl V'*''*'^'* I^»' o^'^r the paRo- 
 
 • "tcu-cylinder" presses °" ''^ *'"« ^f the great 
 
 The Cotton Plant. 
 
 havf iS'^i^LTeaves ySlorrd ^^^T'-V^' ^pecies-all 
 
 off.th. «oed-pote%Sr;,«'^^ti»SittTr];'v'" ?■' ""-^^'^^ f''» 
 spnuff opcn-the .^oeds nro tl.«« ^"latiirity— when ripe they 
 tf.e cottc'n is picked a»d ^ fl?o,.nH'"j ?"^'?'oped «" cotton- 
 out and dried-.the.i serSf J in, ^*i '"^'^ J«gs-next spread 
 ton pLant is best cnS'ed-vMC "l\f eds-where the cot- 
 year-countries to ^^^^S^^^t^^^tt^lS^Z^^ 
 
 Sir Walter Raleigh. 
 
 Q«S'^EFzrb?thl".is''SS,';;iirn;'^^^ ^"I'T. ^^e rel^n of 
 courtier-anecdote of 1^ rS ne^ i../^*^ J"f, talents'as a 
 the velvet ('loak-his onS. s -mH 1**'''M'^ *1"^^" ""d 
 AmerioiV-the colony ^ vS i^ / f^^''''^'::'''". '^^^^^^^ to 
 of tobacco and poUitoes iiS" ' i^Knd- tlLV/^^ impoitition 
 fiilse charge of tr^8on-mi?J;S arrested on a 
 
 tiou-wlmt you think of ISIS ®''''° the Tower-hia execu- 
 
 D. — Quota Tioxs. 
 
 In tlie course of a conij.osition, it will often bo r,e. 
 cessary to represent a person as actually 8])eaki,.. 
 This 18 called direct speech. Jvrlir^r^* JJ^y -'"' 
 the words as reported by another. ^ 
 
 The words which the speaker is represented as 
 using are to be enclosed in quotation JarrsSuc^ 
 
i 
 
 142 
 
 LAtlGtrAGK LK,S:50KS. 
 
 1 
 
 expressions as said I, replied he, etc, arc not to bo 
 put m quotation-innrks, but are to be set off from 
 the spoken words by commas. 
 
 Example.-" I have lived," said the old mnn, « a 
 great many years in poverty." Thrown into the i?i. 
 direct form, this would read as follows :— ■ 
 
 poveTly."^' '"'" ««'d«mt l,e had lived a , rcat many year. In 
 
 In cliangin,; from tl>e direct to tlie indirect form of spoocl. tl.e 
 fust poison becomes tl.e tl.ird ; the present tense, p: .t and e 
 word THIS is changed to that. 
 
 Ex -ircise 58. 
 
 ^ Insert quotation-marks and commas in the follow- 
 ing paragraph where necessaiy :— 
 
 Change tlic foIlo«-ing i^ssnges from the direct to 
 the indirect mode of speech : 
 
 manners us I fjet along." ".uejb, and shaU learu better 
 
 ^^'^^^^f^' "' ^^1'^^* neither profit nor general fame 
 
 'it will feed mj 
 
 my 
 reven 
 
 If^rt feeds nothing else," said Shyloct 
 knew 
 
 4. Burke says, 
 
 ^Vicc tJuit is good 
 
 man wlio was bad fit for ser- 
 
lot to bo 
 off from 
 
 mnn, " a 
 to the in- 
 
 y years iu 
 
 ipnocli, tlie 
 t; and the 
 
 folio \V- 
 
 witli cold 
 !op]e that 
 slf to t!io 
 orse. To 
 ?at them. 
 le nislied 
 ; and tlio 
 >ly by tiie 
 dloi'd re- 
 my liead 
 pHed the 
 i when I 
 
 irect to 
 
 f; "but 
 u better 
 
 al fame 
 'eed my 
 for ser- 
 
 HTRrKl.LAVEOUS EXEnCI.SIJS IN rOMPOSTTTOX. 143 
 ^^—^'i^^^'lSG PoETJtY TO PUOSE. 
 
 Clianging poetry into the order of ,,rosc is in ev 
 ceed.„gIy.ntorestingnn. instructive ees I"" 
 
 -"^,s.stan.asof.rrs.ir..ans-^La:;iit^ 
 the 1 ilgnms " are here given, to^^ether with 1 
 Bpecimen of transposition. ^ 
 
 The Landing of the Pilgrims. 
 
 The brealdng waves dasliod hi-l, 
 
 On a stern and n^'k-boimd co'ut 
 And he woods af,^ain«t a st rmy ^ V 
 
 Their -laiit brandies toss'd ; ^ 
 
 Not as the conqueror cornea, 
 
 1 hoy, the true-hearted c-lma • 
 Not with the roll of the stS' ;irnm8 
 
 And the trumpet that sin^fs ohS f 
 
 Not as the flyhi- come, 
 In silence and in four :— 
 
 K t?^ t|'« d«l>tlis of the desort -loom 
 V\ ith their hymns of lofty cheer. 
 
 What sou-ht they thu. afar? 
 
 The wealth of seas, the spoils of war ?_ 
 Ibey sought a faith's i.iae shrine ! 
 
 Ay call it holy .rround, 
 
 f he soil where first thev trod • 
 
 moored .hon- ^^ru'^^^^^S^^if^^'^^^" <" e«.es 
 
144 
 
 ,'i 
 
 ' r 
 i 
 
 « 
 
 LANGUAGE LESSONS. 
 
 ".e.r advent. On tlm o er ,. i Vl.ev^n'l ""'."P"^ ''«""?od 
 and silence aa ujiirJit fum-Hvii ; ^ , •' ""* ^'ome In fen* 
 WitI, their hynum of oftSee? tl'n'" "','''' "••^"^« co "try 
 deaeit gloom resound. *°">^ ''''®«' tl.ey made tJie deptliB of the 
 
 rM^'L^""^^ No ther obS ;-H !^«''f^^'« t^.J^o gained by 
 ri.iB boon thoy found i„ tl.Kow L l^''-'^ ''^'''»''""« «l>ertv 
 tlienoli where tl^eylirsttJidUredi;^^^^^^ we may well ui^ 
 
suprLFJiE3ijj::NT. 
 
 I. kecai'itulation'^ inflections. 
 
 1- Nouns. 
 
 Sivr/nhr. 
 . boy 
 
 Nominative .... 
 
 PossesHive 
 
 Objective ., 
 
 Nomlnntive 
 
 rosHCHsivo " 
 
 Objective .", 
 
 Nomlnntive 
 
 rossessivc ' 
 
 Objective * 
 
 ..boy's 
 
 •.boy .... 
 
 • ■•lady 
 
 ...Indy'g.., 
 
 •.l.'idy 
 
 • .nmn 
 
 • •..nj.an'B. .. 
 . . xaan 
 
 Phtrai. 
 
 ...boys, 
 -..boys'. 
 . ..boys. 
 
 . ..I.idioH. 
 . ..ladies' 
 • . .Indies 
 
 . . .men. 
 ...men's 
 — men. 
 
 2. Pronouns. 
 Some of the personal pronouns arc rhanffcd to ex 
 f>-ss person, nu.nbcr, gender and case. (See p 85^ 
 Personal pronouns of tlie first jicrson :- 
 
 Plural. 
 
 .'••■... we. 
 our. 
 
 Nominative ^T^"'*- 
 
 Pos8cs8ive. . . 
 
 Objective "..■.';. '">'• """c- 
 
 Personal pro.ioun of the .second person':- 
 
 Nomlnntive. . fi'mUar. pi,,^^^^ 
 
 Po.ssessi ve V. Ji '?"• ' :, : you. 
 
 Objective : . . . ;; ; : . ;; ; ; •{['y^"'' ""»e Jour. 
 
 Deraoustrative pronoun of the third person Z ' ^°"* 
 
 *T . . Singular. p;.,--? 
 
 A^ouiinative i,„ i ,^ ^i-.^rat. 
 
 Po88e.s8lve uf: i ' '*: they. 
 
 Objective : fc'r''^, thefr. 
 
 NoTK u^m, J '''"^'''«^'" them. 
 
l!6 
 
 «L/l'J'LKiMEN'r. 
 
 Ti.o rolatlve pronoun « who" is cl..UKrt.d in fur 
 to express case. (See ]»].. 00, Gl.) 
 
 m 
 
 . Singular and Plural 
 
 NoiiuiiiUive 
 
 I'osHt'saivo. . ^^''"• 
 
 Objective \\'.\ wliose. 
 
 " ' wliorn. 
 
 ,d'^:'!:;,-::^.v'"'^«'''«"'«oupoduati 
 
 aud " which. 
 
 »o possc»«ivo of "that" 
 
 3. Verbs. 
 
 A verb IS cl..uige(] i„ forn, to exjiress mood and 
 tense, and sometimes the person and number of its 
 subject. (See pp. 71-74.) 
 
 Prett. Teme, 
 
 I walk. 
 
 Tlioii wnlkest. 
 He walks. 
 We walk-. 
 Yttii w.aik. 
 They walk. 
 
 Present Perfect Teme. 
 
 hnve walked, 
 h.'ust walked, 
 liiive wjilked. 
 ^ hari walked, 
 have walked. 
 have walked. 
 have walked. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Past ToiK. 
 
 I 
 
 Tliou 
 
 Vou 
 
 lie 
 
 We 
 
 Yoii 
 
 Tliey 
 
 or 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 I shall walk. 
 
 Thou wilt walk 
 walked. "^ will walk. 
 Ave shall walk. 
 You will walk. 
 They will walk. 
 
 Post Perfect Tense. 
 
 I liad walked. 
 Tliou hadst walked 
 He had walked. 
 AVe had walked. 
 You had walked. 
 They had walked. 
 
 i'\mire Perfect Tense. 
 
 J shall have wnllcnd. 
 Thou wilt have walked. 
 • He will have walked. 
 We shall have walked. 
 You will have walked. 
 They will have walked. 
 
EECAPITLLATION OF INFLTJrTIONS. 147 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 
 I ) 
 
 Tkoii 
 
 Wo 
 
 You 
 They J 
 
 walk. 
 
 I 
 
 Thou 
 llo 
 We 
 You 
 
 They J 
 
 havo walked 
 
 Imperative Mood, 
 
 JouaXlr' ^^'^"^' L^-'^ ""Jy with a ,.rououu of the 
 
 Infinitives. 
 
 w.^kor' ^'''''' '^" ^"''^- ^'-^^^"^ ^^^r/ect Tense To have 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Il-wSt'SkS'"''"- ''"''^'''' ^''^"'«'»- ^o^Pound Perfect, 
 
 I SmnKell"lfurTwk.o' n^. *I" ^''"J' '? ^'" ^« «««" t^'-'^t its form 
 i »e subject. "" *"'"""* "^ *^>« P^^^so" and number of 
 
 4- Adjectives. 
 
 An adjective is changed in form to express dif- 
 erent degrees of the same quality. (See i)p. 36, 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Sharp, 
 Mauiy, 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Sharper, 
 Manlier, 
 
 Snperlative. 
 
 Shari)88t. 
 MaiUiest. 
 
 Beautifnl' Mf'ebeauti;.., MoT^autifuI. 
 
 beautiful. Less beautiUu, Least beUutiful; 
 
148 
 
 SUPPLEMiryT. 
 
 Some adjectives are compared irregularly; as: 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Good, 
 
 Well, 
 
 Evil, 
 
 Bad, 
 
 Little, 
 
 Many, 
 
 Much, 
 
 Far, forth. 
 
 Near, 
 
 Late. 
 
 Old, 
 
 Hiud, 
 
 Up, 
 
 Out, 
 
 Fore, 
 
 Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 Better, 
 
 Better, 
 
 WorHe, 
 
 Worse, 
 
 Less, 
 
 More, 
 
 Mt»ro, 
 
 Fartlier, furtlier, 
 
 Nearer, 
 
 L»ter( latter), 
 
 Older or elder, 
 
 Hinder, 
 
 Upper, 
 
 Utter or outer, 
 
 Forujcr, 
 
 Adverbs are compared in the 
 adjectives. (See p. 42.) 
 
 Best. 
 Best. 
 AVorst. 
 Woist. 
 
 Least. 
 
 Most. 
 
 Most. 
 
 Farthest, furthest 
 J^earest o/' next. 
 Latest or last. 
 Oldest or eldest, 
 ilindinost. 
 Upmost. 
 Utmost. 
 Foremost or first. 
 
 same manner as 
 
 i' 
 
 n. TlIK PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYKTAX 
 
 t Jt'^iLTi^ir.'f "' "' " """•' -'■" --' '<> '» 
 
 RuLK 3.-A noun used i„ explanation of another 
 
 ralTv '"^ ^''^r""* *"'"«• '» '" "'« «""« 
 loved -"T' "" ""'■ "" '••'"-'Wist, wa. 
 
 .rn^^v'' ^■~'*. """" '" "■" I"-«'1i<">te, after a„ in- 
 rans,t,ve verb, and meaning the same thing as Z 
 eubjeet, is ih i,he same ei(8e. 
 
THE PRIXCIPAL RULES OP SYNTAX. UO 
 
 Rule 5.--A nonn used independently, by direct 
 address, is in the nominative case. 
 
 Rule 6.--The object of a transitive verb or a 
 preposition is in tlie objective case. 
 
 beltT JoTit "'"" ^'^^^^V«J^ows that something 
 IS in tlie possessive case. 
 
 dcf n!;^ *■""* '"""P"" """'' *eree in number, gen- 
 ropCe'r"" "'" '"* ■'"'"' <" P^o"-- -•"•«^ '* 
 
 BuiE 9.-An adjective limits or describes a noun. 
 
 Role 10._An adverb modifies a verb, an adieo- 
 tivc, or another adverb. '' 
 
 Rtob 11._a preposition joins a noun or a pro- 
 
 rdtottx; *'^" ""''^^ -' -»'"- 
 
 Rule 12.— A conjunction connects words, phrases 
 clauses or sentences, but has neither a pr^CS 
 nor an adverbial signification. """""nal 
 
«' 
 
 CLASSIFIED LIST OF STRONG VKUBS. 
 
 " Verbs in which (he Past Teniae is 
 the Perfect Participle has 
 
 Present. 
 Arise, 
 
 Crow, 
 Draw, 
 Drive, 
 
 Fly, 
 
 Forsake, 
 
 Oive, For-, 
 
 Know, 
 
 hie (to recline,, 
 
 Ride, 
 
 Uiso, A', 
 
 Sfie, ' 
 
 Shalce, 
 
 Show, 
 
 Slay, 
 
 Smite, 
 
 Stride, 
 
 Strive, 
 
 Tjilre, Be-, etc., 
 
 TJirive, 
 
 Tlirow, 
 
 Write, 
 
 Past. 
 
 Arose, 
 Blew, 
 Crew, 
 Drew, 
 Drove, 
 Flew, 
 ': Forsook, 
 Gave, 
 Knew, 
 Lay, 
 Rode, 
 Rose, 
 Saw, 
 Shook, 
 Showed. 
 Slew, 
 Smote, 
 Strode, 
 Strove, 
 Took, 
 Throve, 
 Tlirew, 
 Wrote, 
 
 formed hi/ rowel-char. (jc, and 
 the sxtJIU eu or n." ^ ' """ 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Arisen. 
 
 Blown. 
 
 Crowed (once crown). 
 
 Drawn. 
 
 Driven. 
 
 Flown. 
 
 Forsaken. 
 
 Civen. 
 
 Known. 
 
 I^ain (or lien). 
 
 Ridden. 
 
 Risen. 
 
 Seen. 
 
 Shaken. 
 
 Shown. 
 
 Slain. 
 
 Smitten, 
 
 Stridden. 
 
 Striven, 
 
 Taken. 
 
 Tiiriven. 
 
 Thrown. 
 
 Written, 
 
 In the folloxoing verbs there u n *,>^,i^^ 
 ''mod sound of the Pn^ rlv /?"^<'"C2^ <o assimilatt the 
 Participle'' ^ ^ ''"** Indicative to that of the Pe f^ 
 
 Present 
 
 Past. 
 
 S®"f;^^''XO-<A), R,re, bare, 
 Bear (to carry), jjore, bare, 
 
 Beat, 
 
 Break, 
 
 Choose, 
 
 Shear, 
 Speak, Be-, 
 
 (•50) 
 
 iioat, 
 
 Broke (brake) 
 
 Chose, 
 
 Cleft, clave, or clove. 
 
 Froze, 
 
 Short, 
 
 Spoke, spake, 
 
 Perfect Partkipl 
 
 ijoni, 
 
 BoKie, 
 
 Beaten. 
 
 Broken. 
 
 Clioseu, 
 
 Cleft, cloven. 
 
 Frozen. 
 
 Shorn. 
 
 SpokcA, 
 
Present. 
 
 Steal, 
 
 Swear. 
 
 Tear, 
 
 Tread, 
 
 Wear, 
 
 Weave, 
 
 CL^SS.mb LIST OP STUONG VEllBS. 15. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Stole, 
 
 Swore, stocrc, 
 
 I'ore, 
 
 Trod, or trode, 
 
 >v ore, 
 
 Wove, 
 
 Perfect Pariidpie. 
 
 Stolen. 
 Sworn. 
 Torn. 
 
 Trodden, or trod. 
 ♦V orn. 
 "Woven. 
 
 " /" the fnUoirinr, vrrhs (he Pn'if r^»«. i 
 
 Present. 
 
 JJid, 
 
 Drink, 
 
 (Jet, JJr., For., 
 
 Km- 
 
 Slirink, 
 
 Sii»«, 
 
 Sink, 
 
 Spin, 
 
 Si)it, 
 
 Strike, 
 
 Swim, 
 
 Past. 
 
 Boffan, 
 
 Jiid, bade, 
 
 Drank, 
 
 Got, 
 
 liiiug, 
 
 Shrank, 
 
 Sane, or .siiiipr, 
 
 Sank, or muk, 
 
 Si)iin, siuni. 
 
 Spat, or 8j)it, 
 
 Struck, 
 
 Swam, or swum, 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Uidden. 
 
 Drunk. 
 
 Got (gotten). 
 
 Rung. 
 
 Shrunk. 
 
 Slin;j. 
 
 Sunk, or sunken. 
 
 Spun. 
 
 Si)it. 
 
 Struck, stricken. 
 Swrum. 
 
 -rn «e /*„<„, -»^'^^^«. :5,«^.*^./.c,P<.«.^. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Bind, Un. 
 Uite, 
 Burst, 
 Chide, 
 
 Fuid, 
 
 Grind, 
 
 Hide, 
 
 Shoot, 
 
 Slide, 
 
 Sling, 
 
 Sling 
 
 Slit, 
 
 Stick, 
 
 Past. 
 
 Bound, 
 Bit. 
 Burst, 
 Chid, 
 
 Fought, 
 
 Found, 
 
 Flung, 
 
 Ground, 
 
 Iluntr, 
 
 Hid, 
 
 SJiot, 
 
 Slid, 
 
 Shuij?, 
 
 Slunk 
 
 Slit, 
 
 Stuck, 
 
 Perfect ParticiiAe. 
 
 Bound. 
 
 Bitten, bit. 
 
 Burst. 
 
 Chidden, or cr,M. 
 
 Clung. 
 
 Fouglit. 
 
 Found. 
 
 Flung. 
 
 Ground. 
 
 Uung. 
 
 Hidden, orbA. 
 
 Shot 
 
 Slid, m' eXlACm. 
 
 Sluug. 
 
 Slunk. 
 
 Slit. 
 
 Stuck. 
 
 • fl*ng.wti»ke away m, by luu.gln«,u weak "' "" 
 
152 
 
 Preaent. 
 String, 
 
 Wiu 
 
 Wini, 
 
 Wring, 
 
 SUPPLBMENT. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Strung, 
 
 Swung, 
 
 Won, 
 
 Wound, 
 
 Wrung, 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Strung. 
 
 Swung. 
 
 Won. 
 
 Wound. 
 
 Wrung. 
 
 •' In th. following verbs the Perfect Pnrti.ir.y. 7. 1. 
 
 from t/iipiSt TcZe7 °' ^''" bono^oed 
 
 Present. 
 
 Abide, 
 
 Awake, 
 
 Have, 
 
 Ilold, Be-, With'. 
 
 J-.et, 
 
 Seetlie, 
 
 Sliine, 
 
 Sit, 
 
 btand, With', etc. 
 
 Presera. 
 
 Eat, 
 Kun, 
 
 Past. Perfert Participle. 
 
 Abode, Ahnif 
 Awoke, or awaked, Awaked. 
 
 Jleld "''"*■ 
 
 Let ' "ejd, holden. 
 
 Sod t^*-, 
 
 Sliolie, Sodden, or sod. 
 
 Sat, ti'ono- 
 
 " Unclassified Forms." 
 
 Past. 
 
 Came, 
 Dug. 
 Ate, 
 Ban, 
 
 Perfet. Participle. 
 
 Come. 
 
 D"g. 
 
 Eaten. 
 
 Run. 
 
 u 
 
 Present. 
 
 Am, 
 Uend, 
 Hereave, 
 Beseecli, 
 Bleed. 
 Breed, 
 • Briiij;, 
 Build, He. 
 Burn, 
 
 Cast. 
 
 Catch, 
 
 Clothe, 
 
 Cost, 
 
 Creep. 
 
 Cut, 
 
 " ^"■*' "^^ '''^'"'^«' «>» the preceding classes.' 
 
 Past. 
 
 Was, 
 
 Bent. 
 
 Bereft, 
 
 Besought, 
 
 Bled, ' 
 
 Bred, 
 
 Brought, 
 
 Built, 
 
 Burnt, or burned 
 
 Bouglit. 
 
 Cast, 
 
 Caught, 
 
 Clothed. 
 
 Cost, 
 
 Crept, 
 
 Cut ' 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Been. 
 
 Bent, 
 
 Bereaved, or bereft 
 
 Besought. 
 
 Bled. 
 
 Bred. 
 
 Brought. 
 
 Built. 
 Bum;. 
 Bought 
 Cag*. 
 Caught. 
 . Clad, clothed. 
 Cost. 
 Crept. 
 Cut 
 
Present, 
 
 Dare {to venture), 
 
 Daro (tochaUciuje 
 
 Deal, 
 
 D.>. (In-, 
 
 Dn.'um, 
 
 Dv.oll, 
 
 F:u'l, Z^e-, 
 
 Feed, 
 
 Feel, 
 
 Flee, 
 
 Forbejir, 
 
 Foruct, 
 
 Gild, 
 
 <^in', r.e-, L'a-, 
 
 (<v, 
 
 <->nne, i;/j-, 
 
 Grow, 
 
 lJ(!ar, 
 
 Heave, 
 
 How, 
 
 Hit, 
 
 HlTt, 
 
 Keej), 
 
 Kneel, 
 
 Knit, 
 
 Lay, 
 
 Lead, J/^., 
 
 Leave, 
 
 Lend, 
 
 Light, 
 
 Load, 
 
 Lose, 
 
 Make, 
 
 Mean, 
 
 Meet, 
 
 Mow, 
 
 i'on (to inc'os') 
 
 I'ut. 
 
 Quit, 
 
 Rend, 
 
 Rend, 
 
 Rid, 
 
 Rive, 
 
 Saw, 
 
 Say, 
 
 CLAS.SII.IEJ) LIST OF STIJOXG vkkbs. 
 
 153 
 
 Past. 
 
 Durst, 
 ),i.sPDared, 
 Dealt, 
 Did, 
 
 Dreamt, or dreamed, 
 Dwelt, 
 
 Fell, 
 
 Fed, 
 
 Felt, 
 
 Fled, 
 
 Forbore, 
 
 For-,'()t, 
 
 Gilt, or Gilded, 
 
 Girt, or Girded, 
 
 Went, 
 
 f 'Hi red, 
 
 (xrew. 
 
 Heard, 
 
 Hove, 
 
 Hewed, 
 
 Hit, 
 
 Hurt, 
 
 Kejit, 
 
 Knelt, or knoeird 
 K "> 
 
 Lah, 
 
 Led, 
 
 Left, 
 
 Lent, 
 
 Li^'lited, or lit, 
 
 L<»a(led, 
 
 L(jst, 
 
 l\Lade, 
 
 Meant, 
 
 Blet, 
 
 flowed. 
 
 Paid, 
 
 Pent, or penned. 
 Put, 
 
 Q'lit, or quitted, 
 
 Read, 
 
 Rent, 
 
 Rid, 
 
 Rived, 
 
 ^'Vwed, 
 
 Said, 
 
 Po'/ect Participle 
 
 Dared. 
 Dared. 
 Dealt. 
 Done. 
 
 Dreanjt, or dreamed 
 
 Dwelt. 
 
 Fallen. 
 
 Fed. 
 
 Felt. 
 
 Fled. 
 
 i'orborne. 
 
 Foi'i^otten, for!j;ot 
 
 Gilt, or gilded. 
 
 Girt, or girded. 
 
 Gone. 
 
 Graven. 
 
 Grown. 
 
 Heard. 
 
 Hoveu. 
 
 Hewn. 
 
 Hit. 
 
 Hurt. 
 
 Kept. 
 
 Knelt, or kneeled 
 
 Knit. 
 
 Laid. 
 
 Led. 
 
 Left, 
 
 Lent. 
 
 Lighted, or lit. 
 
 Laden, or loaded. 
 
 Lost. 
 
 Made. 
 
 Sleant. 
 
 Met. 
 
 Mown. 
 
 Paid! 
 
 r'ent, or penned. 
 Put. 
 
 Quit, or quitted. 
 
 Read. 
 
 Rent. 
 
 Rid. 
 
 Riven, 
 
 Sawn. 
 
 SrAd 
 
'I 
 
 il-:! 
 
 4 
 
 i . ( 
 
 164 
 
 Present. 
 
 Seek, 
 
 Sell, 
 
 Send, 
 
 Set, Be-, 
 
 Shavo, 
 
 Shed, 
 
 Shoe, 
 
 Shred, 
 
 Shut, 
 
 Sleep, 
 
 Sow (to scatter 
 
 Speed, 
 
 Spf-i.d, Mis; 
 
 Spix.. ' 
 
 Spread., Be- 
 
 Sjirin", 
 
 feting, 
 
 Strow, or avow, Be- 
 
 Sweat, 
 
 Swcoi), 
 
 Swell, 
 
 Teacli, Mis-, 7?c-, 
 
 Toll, ' 
 
 Think, lie-, 
 
 Thrust, 
 
 W.TX, 
 
 Weep, 
 Wet 
 Whet, 
 Work. 
 
 KUi']>LKRrKN-.i« 
 
 Past. 
 
 Soufiht, . 
 Sold, 
 Seut, 
 Set, 
 
 Shaved, 
 
 S.h,i, 
 
 Sliol, 
 
 Shred, 
 
 Shut, 
 
 Slept, 
 
 Sowed, 
 
 S])ed, 
 
 Spent, 
 
 Split, 
 
 Spread, 
 
 Spraii^T^ or ppning, 
 Stung, "' 
 
 ■, StiYjwed, or strewed, 
 feweat, or sweated, 
 Swept, 
 Swelled, 
 Taiiglit, 
 Told, 
 Tliought, 
 
 Waxed, 
 
 AVej)t, 
 
 Wet; or wotted, 
 
 \\Jict, or whetted. 
 
 V^rought, or worked, 
 
 Perfect Participle 
 
 Sonpiit. 
 
 Sold. 
 
 Scut. 
 
 8et. 
 
 »Shii von. 
 
 Shed. 
 
 Shod. 
 
 Shred, 
 
 Shut. 
 
 Slcj.t. 
 
 Sovvji, 
 
 S{)(!d, 
 
 •^•pent. 
 
 Split. 
 
 J^'road. 
 
 Spr'Mi;:^. 
 
 StlitJfr. 
 
 Strown, strewji, 
 
 Sw(;i!-, or Bweatcd 
 
 Swcj '. 
 
 Swo];,'.i, or swoln. 
 
 raiigjit. 
 
 Told, 
 
 Thonirlit 
 
 Thrast. 
 
 Waxen. 
 
 Wej't. 
 
 y^yt, or wetted. 
 
 Whet, or whetted 
 
 Wrought, or worked 
 
'ticiple 
 
 3wn, 
 .veiited 
 
 swolii. 
 
 ,-■(]. 
 
 cttfni, 
 
 worked 
 
 APPEiNDIX. 
 
 Tlie following are the papers set for the examination 
 for entrance to High Schools and Collegiate Institutes 
 since 1874 : — 
 
 Values. 
 21 
 
 28 
 
 10 
 
 ENTEANCE EXAMINATION, JUNE, 1874. 
 
 1. 
 
 Analyze, " Of the ancient colonies, Mr. Scorseby 
 unlortimately obtained no tlirect information." 
 ^. ± arse, " D'Israeli, who is now Premier of Britain 
 . spent the early part of bis life in writing novolH." 
 rf. C^ive the positive forms convsponding to 'most' 
 ' first," next,' and ' elclost.' 
 ^^r *!','^,l'^'''^'al« oi ' piano,' ' thief,' monkey,' ' toy ' 
 
 ^gulf, ' oebo,; ' penny,' ' fowl' and ' Norman.' 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 o. Give the funjiuine.s of • actor.' 'hero.' • widower ' 
 negro "marquis,' and ' friar ;' and the mascu- 
 biK-^ of ♦ duck,' • duchess,' and ' countess.' 
 
 b. Delme preposition, conjunction, ADYEaB, SUBJECT 
 
 and CASE. ' 
 
 7. Wiiteout in full, in the ordinary form, the indi- 
 _ cativo mood of ' sing.' 
 
 8. Give the past tense and past participle of ' sit ' 
 ^ slide,' ' stoop,' ' hide,' ' hurt,' ♦ wink,' ' swim,'' 
 
 9. Correct, where necessary, the following sentences . 
 it makes no difference to either you or I.' 
 
 ' Neither John nor James is coming.' 
 'Why aint you going to play cricket.' 
 Ihe burning of the Bavarian was one of the 
 
 most dreadful accidents that has happened 
 
 for many years. 
 
 Value.. ENTRANCE EXAMINATION, DECEMEEK, 1871 
 
 1. Analyse, 
 " By Nebo's lonely mountain. 
 
 On this side Jordan's wave, 
 In a vale in the land of Moab 
 There lies a lonely grave." 
 
 2. Parse " John studies two houi-s daily, but James 
 hia brother, passes his time in playmg cheaa." 
 
 12 
 
 38 
 
156 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 Valuos.j I]NTlUNCEExAir'V4TTnw T^ 
 
 "^''"!7?,"'^.'«"«^^ngsemVuc4-!! syntax that 
 Mv f/ *'''/ "^^^ '^'^^^ child 
 
 Will fill tho chaise, so you must ri.ln 
 , .On horseback after we •' 
 
 ' II.T" ^%^*f^^^* '"^ i"<Jollu7te article " 
 Ho IS great, hut truth is greater than ub all " 
 
 ENTBANCE EXAMINATION, JUNK I875 
 
 "^^'rii:":^^-^-. -^0 was an early 
 
 ^ fore breakfast. . ^"""^^ ^^ ^^^ study be- 
 
 Analj-Bo — 
 
 By the struggling n,o, : i^'''> ^"P^nig, 
 3.^V^tethe1;KS^-^^^^ 
 
 a"'^"«cZ./thefn;s.^li^^^ "^ "*^^'^' /'"''"^ 
 fcnd.; the compamt?veTnd ./,;''?';•' t^^^' '^"^^ 
 late, near, old, drrix^\. ^^ '^''^\^''' ^''''''^ ^^ 
 Biuguhu- preseutSicSiie^ ti^i ""'^ *^^^ ^^^^^ ^ 
 ^ ^ pie, and the past pSnWf ^ ^''''''* -l^^^'^^^i- 
 
 ^^wise as a philosopher! ' ^°^' ^^^ ^'^^^^^'^^ «« 
 I'ereon, personal pronoun, and prepoBitioiv 
 
 18 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 fly/ 'hoof, 
 
 son-in-law.' 
 
 of ' uear,' 
 
 ud 'honor- 
 
 0. tlio third 
 
 sent parti- 
 ' Mlowiiig 
 
 .' ' thrust,' 
 
 I JPiououn. 
 'nthx that 
 
 lido 
 
 aJl." 
 
 ^875. 
 
 fiu early 
 tudy bb- 
 
 Jt'sbt, 
 hig, 
 y hghf. 
 
 % lia'i-t', 
 'ck and 
 n-m?, of 
 ) tliird 
 partici- 
 md Zjt'. 
 vrittcn 
 
 lowing 
 
 '>ne it. 
 "g aa 
 
 itioiv 
 
 Va]ues.|ENTi;ANCE EXAMINATION. MCEMBER. 
 
 167 
 
 45 
 12 
 
 80 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 Values.! 
 
 20 I 1 
 
 187S. 
 
 1. Parse --Who would toil all his hfo for a mast- 
 
 that treated him thus ? * 
 
 2. Analyse— 
 
 For their '.-an country much disdain 
 Q Tir -x , l^'iglish often sliow. 
 
 a.*,.2>«^fc- /j<rs, a:idcns«; the possessive plura 
 of u-/,o, luhi, and f;.«iZ..nm ; all the porsnL i 
 ho ..ngulur of tho present and the past indie 
 ve of w^ll the principal verb, and all the per- 
 
 01 uill the auxiliary verb ; and the present a"d 
 past participles of fnm, ,ue and shine ^ 
 
 4. Define Conjunction, Vkkb, and Suhject 
 o. xNamothne adjectives that are irrcirularly com- 
 pareu and compare thuni. 
 
 "■ ^^""'Jtf "''^' *"•"•'■' ^'°" °^''^'^^« i^ tii^ following 
 sentences, givuig your reasons :- " 
 
 m^w"' '"" " ^^^"'^^ -i^^^ «3-novial 
 Ton elevenths are equal to twenty twenty-twos. 
 
 SSeTno d-ff''^'-^' ''"T^ ''""^''^^ '' meet a.n. 
 Ihore IB no difference of opinion between mo and 
 
 ENTKANCE EXAMINATION, JfJNE, 1876. 
 
 Gave the masculine or fominiao form, as the case 
 uay be, of hero, sultana, countess, ex out.' r 
 Pmo U «^ "-^-oy hly, folio, gus. bi-oSe pea! 
 
 of 1? 'n f '"P^':^^''"'^"'-^ ^^"I'orlativo deg re. 
 
 of la., il, funny; the past tenoo and past parti 
 
 lurso On returning home last Friday ni-ht n- 
 found no small excitement in Uuclo Chu-C 
 
 10 i 8. AnSS"^''°""^^^°"^'^^^^^"^-^^--'' 
 " Saint Augustine ! well hast thou said 
 iiiat of our vices wo can frame 
 A ladder, if we will but tread 
 
 \R A r^ I Beneath our feet each deed of shamp '» 
 
 {a) The river h'as raised six inches this mornin^ 
 (< ) Of the two Henries, this is the youngest 
 
infl 
 
 APPlNDrx. 
 
 !::l^:j "" -^^-^^cr E^MiNAHcv, JoNK. ISTO-Co^./nu.rf. 
 
 I would lito to liave 
 
 (</) Don't he know tJiat 
 wont with hhn ? 
 
 <> W)^''! • '^''"* ''"^ ^'^^ <Jown to rest- 
 
 6. Into what Clu- .s ara r^,., 
 
 Give an 
 
 '^'aluys. 
 
 .»^,ENTUAK,,E EXAMINATION, DECEMBER !„„ 
 <«" ( 1. Parse : ' 
 
 ^ttl"LrS'* r ,S 'wenly ,<.g„,, ,b„, 
 
 fast anchor L^ ,1 ^V'-'"'"' "" I'oard-wo 
 
 Vail; t hS ''^Sct rr"°;'''v — •" 
 
 island." quarter of a mile from the 
 
 plural ofThi,,'n^ey.t/°C";h ""^''^^ '^"^ 
 ami superlative degrees of m?'v^' coniparative 
 and t)inr>o<f +^^ ^^ ma' V, tedious, holy 
 
 , Si^ * r* iSeh '"■'^"■p^ ■■"■•' "-* 
 
 ■i. Correct any mistakr Tn'/u^''' '^""' '''•' P^y- 
 giving /.^I'et; s :'' '^' ^"""^^^"^ «^""^^^^^s. 
 
 o' LT^^a^'^ "■ S°' ^' ^^'lys up tlieKtroet 
 
 3. J^hat there figure didn't ought toh^ve ten sub- 
 
 rinS''^' '"v '''P''^* bets,-oon him and me 
 Classify adjectives, and nve an eT^imil nf », 
 class. ».» ample of dach 
 
 fi. Give the rule for t le usr of fr.« i x- 
 </ki«. '^ ^^^ *^^ ti^Q relative pronoun 
 
 JDLYE .MI .TIONS, 1877 
 ADMISSIO.. TO HIGH SCHOOLS 
 
 40 1. Parse 
 
 -nes' schemes and in conceafing hS owL " 
 
APi>KKJ.>JJi. 
 
 itinued. 
 
 to to Jiave 
 
 ^" "propo. 
 
 ? Give ua 
 ER, 1876, 
 
 fees above 
 
 ^s thou^'lit 
 
 flocks to 
 
 from the 
 joard — wo 
 
 from tlio 
 
 iies, boan, 
 ular and 
 Jjparative 
 
 ii'I ))tibt 
 
 ''•^'. ply. 
 
 .'uteiices, 
 
 i3en sub- 
 
 of dach 
 •roiioun 
 
 160 
 
 B diffl. 
 iscorer 
 adver* 
 
 Viiluoa 
 
 8 j 3 
 14 
 
 luoa. Admission to Than Schools. Joly. \mi -Continued. 
 10 2. Analyse : 
 
 " 3!h;T°T"-^''°\1'^ °" ^'"•^'^ "*'^^'r confusodJy and 
 wi h hcsitauon the apinehrnsion of so etramro 
 a .h.nger provaihug with tJu-s. who feared no 
 
 <JVnfc)r, 
 
 Writo sentences showing the several ways in which 
 
 , '* wlio" and " th.it" are used. 
 Give the plural of 'hero.' ' crocus,' • genus,' 'cenins ' 
 
 ::& .' "^•' •^'^"^^*' ;«™'' 'app':nX> 
 
 fcnecp, - «s,' 'cargo;' and the possessive 
 Bmgnluri^id plural of ' beau.' •mo.se.' ' omT 
 
 i^^:;^c;^;;t?i^7''--^^-----g^. 
 
 Wnte the present participle, the past pai ticiplo and 
 
 i.we^ of «,«, do, go, catch, cat, tear, art, rchi lose 
 Correct any mistakes you detect i, the annexed 
 8c.ntene( H, giving your reaso. s • annexed 
 
 ill u ^"' '''f '"^ ^''' '™"^<^ '•^^■'^ ^^^ne very di Jerent 
 ^ l^o";'' ' '^^ momorandas to ussi.-.t'his clerk's 
 
 9 
 
 15 
 
 (b) lie made a few momorau 
 memory. 
 
 (c) Jano got on quicker in her studies than her 
 
 {e) I hardly know who to make my complaint to, 
 
 Values., 
 
 ». c, 
 
 6 i 3 
 
 DECEMBER EXAMINATIONS, 1877. 
 ADMISSION TO HIGH SCHOOLS. ' 
 
 L Parse : 
 " Sunday after Sunday he had the keen dr^'M of 
 eeenig Criuiean officers from Sr^ i^l^f 
 |;nd..^.t in hi. congregation."-^;^ :^cUi:^ 
 
 Analyse : 
 
 Ihiving heard the same preaching for fifteen vg.i.-s 
 he had ceased to admire it. ^'"''^• 
 
 IdveS'"' '''''^''' ^'""'"^' ^'^^^0°. Verb, and 
 4. Give the pinral of monkey, wharf stnff nnfo* 
 be Bingu .r of necktiesf' bSS^^n. ILe's Ih^ 
 ^T::! ^i,^:!^^.'._^«-..-Pl^ew ; the^^rmiara! 
 tV,l /r- J '^7P^''^,^">0 OI Deautiful, prettv 'far- 
 
 buy frv T^''^' P^'.^«"* indicatiJlSve of 
 buy, fry ; the past participle of meat, beat, seat , 
 
160 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Values, 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 1 
 1 
 
 Vfllucn. 
 
 G 
 
 44 
 
 10 
 
 24 
 
 12 
 
 Admikkion to ITion ScnooLs, Die, 1877— Continued. 
 
 tho proHont participle of pfot, firo, occur, differ, 
 
 (lie J uiul tho pos.;(.'3i-avo cuso of who, ladies, one, 
 
 ho. 
 C. Quote tho rule cf syntax violated in each of the 
 
 following i;oiit(;ii(;i;3 : — 
 Botwnen you and I this must not Lo allowed any 
 
 loii.f^cr. 
 I w('Jidt'r how ho ever camo to Icfrioud ^uch a 
 
 criminal as mo. 
 Neither Joliu nor Jumna nor Mary huvo found it. 
 Tht:r(! is SDVcral boys in th| room. 
 6. Correct tho following txprossiona : — 
 Them nutfi iy mine. 
 I kind of thou,'/iit that Tonj was thrro. 
 I iirulorstand J ::= 1 J to mean that throe twos equal 
 
 one and a lialf. 
 
 JUTjY examinations, 1S78. 
 ADMISSION TO HIGH SCHOOLS. 
 
 i. Explain tlio mcaninpj of 'Etymolo^y,' 'Common 
 Gender,' 'InfuiiMvo Mood,' ' russivo Voice,' 
 « Suliordinnte Con junction,' • Pluporfcot Tense.' 
 
 2. Time nftor limo did this adniirahlo p.irejit seek to 
 
 win lur j'roward child back to his duty, fondly 
 ima,crinin,':j that a mothor'a love must bo the moat 
 potent of allinliuencea. 
 Parse this sei teuce. 
 
 3. Analyse tho following:— '-The Lords refusing to 
 
 concur, tlie Commons votod that tho supremo 
 authority resided in themselves, and had the 
 House of Lords closed." 
 
 4. Write the plural of attnrni'ij, tobacco, medium, Mm- 
 
 sulman, wharf; the positive and suprrlativo of 
 better, worse, more, former; tho past tonse, the 
 present participle and the par.t participle oi ar- 
 rive, swing, sit, die, choose, lay, bunt. 
 
 5. Correct the following sentences, and give tho rule 
 
 ui each case : 
 
 a) Him and me went to town yesterday. 
 
 b) Not one in fifty of these writers can ex 
 press themselves with correctness. 
 
 (c) Our happiness or misery are, in a 
 measure, placed in our own hands. 
 
 {d) He was drove lat hard that he 
 throwed up his situatiDn. 
 
 6. What kinds of adjectives cannot be compared, and 
 
 what nouns have the same form in both numbers 7 
 
 great 
 
 soon 
 
7 — Continued. 
 
 occur, differ, 
 a, ladies, ouc, 
 
 each of tbo 
 
 allowod any 
 
 rioud aich it 
 
 ivo found it. 
 
 •CO t.'A'OS C(iaul 
 
 ■8. 
 )L3. 
 
 •,' ' Common 
 ssive Voice,' 
 !rf(\'t Tense.' 
 ireut seek to 
 duty, fondly 
 it bo the most 
 
 3 refusing to 
 tbo supremo 
 and had the 
 
 ncdium, Mm- 
 
 uporlativo of 
 
 st toiise, the: 
 
 ticiple oi ar- 
 
 U. 
 
 ;ivc the rule 
 
 Rterday. 
 
 iters can ex 
 
 uess. 
 
 , in a great 
 
 unus. 
 
 j.at he soon 
 
 ampared, and 
 :>th uuiabers 7 
 
i 
 
 V , : 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 . « i 
 
J^-.*'' 
 
 NLC BNC 
 
 3 3286 02712056 3 
 
 
 ■■■, ■-. '>"1 
 
 'Hi^